Casio Qt6600 Reference Manual User Ece449c9 5cfd 43d1 89db 9344cd5d0bd8

User Manual: casio qt6600 Casio Car Video System QT-6600 User Guide |

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 240

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

QT-6600
Touch Screen Smart Terminal
———————————————————————

Reference Manual
Version 1.0 November 2008

C
C

Preface
This manual is intended to be used as a reference to the QT-6600 system. It provides details
to allow whole understanding of the system capabilities, its operation, and how it can be used
to solve many problems within the retail outlet. This manual does not describe actual
programming, which is covered in the QT-6600 programming manual.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
1. Introduction
This chapter describes the concepts of development of the QT-6600 system.
2. Hardware configuration
This chapter outlines the hardware, optional devices and configurations of QT-6600
system.
3. Application systems
This chapter outlines the application system and overviews the function provided for the
QT-6600 system.
4. Manager operation
This chapter explains the manager operations to use QT-6600 system.
5. Registrations
This chapter explains actual registration operations with example.
6. Refund mode operation
This chapter explains registrations in the RF or REG– mode.
7. Read and reset
This chapter explains detail of the read and reset operations and reports.
8. Appendices
These chapters show the record format and descriptions of individual files, total
calculation method, meaning of error messages, etc.
• System down and recovery (in the Installation and Down Recovery manual)
This chapter explains actions to take and recovery methods when the system goes down.
Note: Casio reserves the right to change equipment and specifications without obligation
and notification. The terms used in this manual may be different from those used in
other manuals of Casio’s product.

Printing history
Manual version
Version 1.0 : November, 2008

Revised points

R-2

Software version
First Edition: November, 2008

Version 1.0

Introduction
The QT-6600 is a versatile intelligent terminal developed in accordance with the following concepts.
1) System concept
Developing a high performance economical system by adopting the restaurant, bar, fast
food system.
– Shared check tracking
The QT-6600 system has the capability of check tracking system.
– Shared printer system
All terminals in the cluster can share remote printer(s).
– Collection, consolidation, and auto-program functions
The QT-6600 system is equipped with these functions by utilizing high-speed in-line data
transfer system.
– Versatile terminal
With the QT-6600 system, any terminal has the same function, and can be designated as
the master terminal by programming.
2) Software concept
A flexible application system for development, adopting the following methods:
– Function classified application system
3) Terminal hardware concept
Color LCD with touch panel
In addition to the above, the QT-6600 is also a terminal following characteristics:
– Expandability
The QT-6600 system can be connected to various peripheral devices (slip printer, modem,
a personal computer, etc.)
– Reliability
The QT-6600 is provided with a self-diagnosis program so that the terminal can check the
hardware. When a malfunction occurs during processing, an error report is logged into the
system memory so that the error can quickly be corrected.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-3

Contents

To prevent malfunctions caused by the weak batteries, charge the memory
protection batteries for over 12-hours before installation or after a longtime vacation
(over 30 days).
• Before installation, initialize the terminal and leave it power on over 12-hours.
• After a longtime vacation, initialize the terminal and restore the program data if the
terminal is in malfunction, and leave it power on over 12-hours.
• QT-6600 consumes batteries for saving data during 2 minutes after turning off the
terminal.
• Do NOT power off the terminal over 10 times while a short term. (Except INIT or FC
operation) Otherwise, it makes weak batteries.
R-4

Hardware configuration ..................................................................... R-10
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.

General configuration ............................................................................................
Hardware diagram .................................................................................................
Keyboard ...............................................................................................................
Display...................................................................................................................
Cash drawer ..........................................................................................................
Input/output connectors.........................................................................................
Optional peripherals ..............................................................................................
System configuration .............................................................................................

R-10
R-11
R-12
R-13
R-14
R-15
R-16
R-17

Application systems........................................................................... R-23

2-1.

General description of application system ...................................... R-23

2-1-1.
2-1-2.
2-1-3.
2-1-4.
2-1-5.
2-1-6.
2-1-7.

2-2.

File concept ...........................................................................................................
Linkage of totalizers ..............................................................................................
Function keys ........................................................................................................
Keyboard layout .....................................................................................................
Mode control .........................................................................................................
Operation prompt and error messages .................................................................
Printing control system ..........................................................................................

R-23
R-24
R-25
R-25
R-26
R-26
R-26

General description of individual function keys ............................. R-29

2-2-1. System keys .......................................................................................................... R-29
2-2-2. Finalize keys .......................................................................................................... R-30
2-2-3. Transaction keys .................................................................................................... R-30

2-3.

Remote printer control ....................................................................... R-39

2-3-1.
2-3-2.
2-3-3.
2-3-4.

2-4.

Remote printer system configuration ....................................................................
Remote printer control setting ...............................................................................
Remote printer output control................................................................................
Remote printer backup processes ........................................................................

R-39
R-40
R-41
R-41

Check tracking system....................................................................... R-44

2-4-1. Shared check tracking system .............................................................................. R-44
2-4-2. Shared check tracking requirement ....................................................................... R-45
2-4-3. Data backup when the master goes down ............................................................ R-45

2-5.

Other check tracking system control ............................................... R-46

2-5-1. The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization ............................ R-46
2-5-2. Table transfer ......................................................................................................... R-46
2-5-3. Store and recall ..................................................................................................... R-46

2-6.

Clerk control function ........................................................................ R-48

2-6-1.
2-6-2.
2-6-3.
2-6-4.

2-7.

Clerk interrupt .......................................................................................................
Clerk detail memory ..............................................................................................
Clerk training .........................................................................................................
Manager mode control ..........................................................................................

R-48
R-49
R-49
R-49

Arrangement key function and scheduler ........................................ R-51

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-5

Contents
2-7-1. Arrangement key function ..................................................................................... R-51
2-7-2. Arrangement program example ............................................................................. R-55
2-7-3. Scheduled execution of arrangement function ...................................................... R-55

2-8.

Making graphic logo........................................................................... R-56

2-8-1. About graphic logo ................................................................................................ R-56
2-8-2. Making graphic logo procedure ............................................................................. R-56

2-9.

Hourly item .......................................................................................... R-57

2-9-1. Programming necessary files before using hourly item function. .......................... R-57

2-10. Time and attendance .......................................................................... R-58
2-10-1. Corresponding relations of the file ........................................................................ R-59
2-10-2. Clock-in operation ................................................................................................. R-62
2-10-3. Clock-out operation ............................................................................................... R-65

2-11. Sign on control ................................................................................... R-68
2-11-1.
2-11-2.
2-11-3.
2-11-4.

Sign on ..................................................................................................................
Solution to abnormality of master terminal ............................................................
Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal ..........................................................
Sign on compulsory ..............................................................................................

R-68
R-69
R-69
R-69

2-12. IDC (Item Data Capture) ..................................................................... R-70
2-12-1.
2-12-2.
2-12-3.
2-12-4.
2-12-5.
2-12-6.

Available capturing items ......................................................................................
Set up the IDC start / end .....................................................................................
How to memorize the captured items ....................................................................
IDC data file structure ...........................................................................................
IDC data type ........................................................................................................
Transferring IDC ....................................................................................................

R-70
R-73
R-74
R-75
R-81
R-82

2-13. Electronic journal ............................................................................... R-83
2-13-1.
2-13-2.
2-13-3.
2-13-4.

Storing electronic journal ......................................................................................
Issuing electronic journal report ............................................................................
Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after sales.....
Transferring electronic journal memory .................................................................

R-83
R-83
R-83
R-84

2-14. Simple time and attendance .............................................................. R-85
2-14-1.
2-14-2.
2-14-3.
2-14-4.

Clock-in operation .................................................................................................
Clock-out operation ...............................................................................................
Worktime display ...................................................................................................
Report ...................................................................................................................

R-85
R-86
R-86
R-86

2-15. Magnetic card reading ....................................................................... R-87
3.

Manager operation ............................................................................. R-88

3-1.

Machine initialization ......................................................................... R-88

3-1-1. INIT ....................................................................................................................... R-88
3-1-2. Flag clear .............................................................................................................. R-88
R-6

3-1-3. INIT 2 .................................................................................................................... R-89
3-1-4. INIT code ............................................................................................................... R-89

3-2.

IPL (Initial Program Loading) ............................................................ R-89

3-2-1. IPL ......................................................................................................................... R-89
3-2-2. System configuration before IPL operation ........................................................... R-90

3-3.

Manager function................................................................................ R-91

3-3-1.
3-3-2.
3-3-3.
3-3-4.
3-3-5.
3-3-6.
3-3-7.
3-3-8.
3-3-9.
3-3-10.
3-3-11.
3-3-12.
3-3-13.
3-3-14.
3-3-15.
3-3-16.
3-3-17.
3-3-18.
3-3-19.
3-3-21.
3-3-20.
3-3-22.
3-3-23.
3-3-24.
3-3-25.

3-4.

System connection check ..................................................................................... R-92
Remote on ............................................................................................................. R-93
Remote off ............................................................................................................. R-93
Busy reset ............................................................................................................. R-94
Stock maintenance ................................................................................................ R-95
Drawer for clerk ..................................................................................................... R-96
CHK# (Clerk interrupt)........................................................................................... R-96
Order ID change .................................................................................................... R-97
Error log print ........................................................................................................ R-98
System re-configuration ........................................................................................ R-99
Item Data Capture ............................................................................................... R-100
Euro change over ................................................................................................ R-101
Clerk window ....................................................................................................... R-102
Customer ............................................................................................................. R-103
Customer busy reset ........................................................................................... R-104
Sound .................................................................................................................. R-104
Print batch maintenance file ................................................................................ R-105
Execute batch maintenance file .......................................................................... R-106
Re-index the scanning PLU file ........................................................................... R-107
FTP client ............................................................................................................ R-108
Licence code entry .............................................................................................. R-108
Maintenance data ................................................................................................ R-109
Printer logo send ................................................................................................. R-110
Clerk number ....................................................................................................... R-111
Operation monitor ............................................................................................... R-111

System command execution ........................................................... R-112

3-4-1. X/Z reporting ....................................................................................................... R-112
3-4-2. X/Z collection / consolidation ............................................................................... R-114
3-4-3. Remote power control ......................................................................................... R-114

3-5.

Data communication system ........................................................... R-115

3-5-1. Inline / online connectors .................................................................................... R-115
3-5-2. Hardware interface .............................................................................................. R-116
3-5-3. Inline / online functions ........................................................................................ R-118

3-6.

Collection / Consolidation system .................................................. R-119

3-6-1. X/Z collection ....................................................................................................... R-121
3-6-2. X/Z consolidation ................................................................................................. R-123
3-6-3. X/Z collection / consolidation ............................................................................... R-126

3-7.

Auto-programming function ............................................................ R-129

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-7

Contents
3-7-1. Auto-programming functions ............................................................................... R-129
3-7-2. Auto-program operation and CF card utilities ...................................................... R-130

Registrations..................................................................................... R-136
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
4-18.
4-19.
4-20.
4-21.
4-22.
4-23.

Clerk sign on / off operation ................................................................................
Voiding the last registered item ( key operation) ....................................
Voiding the previous registered item ( key operation).............................
Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction ......................................
Using the list function ..........................................................................................
Using the set menu function and pulldown group function ..................................
Post entry ............................................................................................................
Separate check ...................................................................................................
Open check .........................................................................................................
Split payment (Dutch account) ............................................................................
Media change ......................................................................................................
Eat-in / Takeout ...................................................................................................
Scanning PLU .....................................................................................................
Shift PLU .............................................................................................................
Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)............................................
Round repeat function .........................................................................................
Mix & match / coupon ..........................................................................................
Customer .............................................................................................................
Table sharing .......................................................................................................
Order character change ......................................................................................
Item search .........................................................................................................
Scan Mix & match ...............................................................................................
Time calculation ..................................................................................................
Additional PLU character ....................................................................................

R-136
R-137
R-138
R-138
R-140
R-141
R-144
R-145
R-146
R-146
R-147
R-148
R-148
R-151
R-151
R-152
R-153
R-154
R-155
R-155
R-155
R-156
R-157
R-158

Refund mode operation ................................................................... R-160
5-1.

Selecting REF or REG– mode ............................................................................ R-160

Read and reset operations .............................................................. R-162
6-1.
6-2.

The procedures of reading or resetting ............................................................... R-162
Report sample ..................................................................................................... R-164

A-1. Function key list ................................................................................... R-180
A-2. File format ............................................................................................. R-185
A-3. Counter and Totalizer calculation method ......................................... R-222
A-4. Error messages .................................................................................... R-226
Index ...............................................................................................................R-233

R-8

Hardware configuration ......................................................................... R-10
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.

General configuration .................................................................................... R-10
Hardware diagram ........................................................................................ R-11
Keyboard ....................................................................................................... R-12
Display .......................................................................................................... R-13
Cash drawer .................................................................................................. R-14
Input/output connectors ................................................................................ R-15
Optional peripherals ...................................................................................... R-16
System configuration .................................................................................... R-17

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-9

Hardware Configuration
1.

Hardware configuration
This section outlines the hardware, optional devices, and configurations of the QT-6600
system.

1-1.

General configuration
Front view
Touch screen panel

Display on/off key
Pilot lamp
i-Button key receiver
(only for QT-6600-DLS)
Microphone
C
C

Stand

Customer display

Power switch cover

Panel fixing screw

Connector cover

Rear view

R-10

1-2.

Hardware diagram

1024 x 768 dot color LCD

64MB

Ext. speaker

32MB

Ext. microphone

NOR
FROM

RS-232C COM6

RAM

RS-232C COM5

Flash
Memory

RS-232C COM4

RS-232C COM1

Microphone

Inline

Drawer 1 i/f

QT-6011DLS
(except for
QT-6600-DLS)

CPU

RS-232C COM3

i-Button
key i/f

RS-232C COM2

Speaker

Drawer 2 i/f

Max. 126 key touch screen

CF card

Power switch cover

HUB

Other terminals
PC or LAN printer

Slip
printer
SP-1300

Power
supply

Remote
printer
UP-400

Remote
display
QT-6060D

PRT-CB-8A/-8B

Scanner

PRT-CB-8C

AC Adptor

MODEM
or
PC

QT-6061CB or QT-6062CB

Drawer

CAT5 UTP cable

Drawer

PRT-CB-8A/-8B

PRL-CB-2

MCR
QT-6046MCR

Remote
printer

UP-400

Power
supply

Remote
printer
UP-360

Power
supply

Note: Shadowed device and dot line indicate option devices.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-11

Hardware Configuration
1-3.

Keyboard
1-3-1.

Standard keyboard
REG

C01

31-10-08

12:34 PM 001234
HOME

PLU010 PLU020 PLU030 PLU040 PLU050 PLU060 PLU070

PAGE
UP

PLU009 PLU019 PLU029 PLU039 PLU049 PLU059 PLU069

PLU008 PLU018 PLU028 PLU038 PLU048 PLU058 PLU068

PLU007 PLU017 PLU027 PLU037 PLU047 PLU057 PLU067

•0.00
12345678901234567890

1-3-2.

ESC/
SKIP

MODE

CLK#

CLEAR

RECEIPT

TABLE
RECEIPT

PAGE
DOWN

PLU006 PLU016 PLU026 PLU036 PLU046 PLU056 PLU066

END

PLU005 PLU015 PLU025 PLU035 PLU045 PLU055 PLU065

PLU004 PLU014 PLU024 PLU034 PLU044 PLU054 PLU064

YES

VOID

#/NS

COVERS

PLU003 PLU013 PLU023 PLU033 PLU043 PLU053 PLU063

SEAT#

POST
ENTRY

SEP
CHK

PLU002 PLU012 PLU022 PLU032 PLU042 PLU052 PLU062

FUNC
LIST

FIN.
LIST

TBL
TRANS

PLU001 PLU011 PLU021 PLU031 PLU041 PLU051 PLU061

PLU#

SUBTOTAL

REPORTS

•

CASH/AMT
/TEND

LIST
1

LIST
2

LIST
3

LIST
4

LIST
5

LIST
6

LIST
7

NEW/OLD
CHK

MENU
1

MENU
2

MENU
3

MENU
4

MENU
5

MENU
6

MENU
7

Hard key code of keyboard
REG

C01

31-10-08

12:34 PM 001234

•0.00
12345678901234567890
006
005

048

060

072

084

096

108

120

132

047

059

071

083

095

107

119

131

046

058

070

082

094

106

118

130

045

057

069

081

093

105

117

129

044

056

068

080

092

104

116

128

043

055

067

079

091

103

115

127

012

018

024

030

036

042

054

066

078

090

102

114

126

011

017

023

029

035

041

053

065

077

089

101

113

125

022

028

034

040

052

064

076

088

100

112

124

027

033

039

051

063

075

087

099

111

123

026

032

038

050

062

074

086

098

110

122

025

031

037

049

061

073

085

097

109

121

C
004

010

7
003

009

4
002

014

007

015

008

1
001

016

013

9
021

6
020

3
019

•

• In case of assigning a double or quadruple key, the key code of the key is shadowed part
of the key.

R-12

1-4.

Display
1-4-1. Main display part
1 Main display part: Used for displaying numeric entries, registration, subtotal amount, etc.
2 Menu level display part: Used for displaying the current shift PLU, menu sheet and 2nd unit price level.
3 Keyboard part: Mainly used for keyboard (sometimes it is used for pop-up window)
REG

C01

31-10-08

12:34 PM 001234
HOME

PLU010 PLU020 PLU030 PLU040 PLU050 PLU060 PLU070

PAGE
UP

PLU009 PLU019 PLU029 PLU039 PLU049 PLU059 PLU069

PLU008 PLU018 PLU028 PLU038 PLU048 PLU058 PLU068

PLU007 PLU017 PLU027 PLU037 PLU047 PLU057 PLU067
PAGE
DOWN

PLU006 PLU016 PLU026 PLU036 PLU046 PLU056 PLU066

END

PLU005 PLU015 PLU025 PLU035 PLU045 PLU055 PLU065

•0.00
ESC/
SKIP

MODE

CLK#

CLEAR

RECEIPT

TABLE
RECEIPT

PLU004 PLU014 PLU024 PLU034 PLU044 PLU054 PLU064

YES

VOID

#/NS

COVERS

PLU003 PLU013 PLU023 PLU033 PLU043 PLU053 PLU063

SEAT#

POST
ENTRY

SEP
CHK

PLU002 PLU012 PLU022 PLU032 PLU042 PLU052 PLU062

FUNC
LIST

FIN.
LIST

TBL
TRANS

PLU001 PLU011 PLU021 PLU031 PLU041 PLU051 PLU061

PLU#

SUBTOTAL

REPORTS

•

CASH/AMT
/TEND

1-4-2.

LIST
1

LIST
2

LIST
3

LIST
4

LIST
5

LIST
6

LIST
7

NEW/OLD
CHK

MENU
1

MENU
2

MENU
3

MENU
4

MENU
5

MENU
6

MENU
7

Main display part contents

Mode

Clerk

Date

Time

REG C01
01-01-01 12:34
001234
1 Spagetti
•20.00 T1↑
1 Spagetti
•20.00 T1
7.5%
%-1.75 T1
1 Coffee
•8.00
1 Hamburger
•2.00 T1
15%
%-0.30 T1
1 Milk
•2.00
2 Apple Juice
•5.00
1 Coffee
•8.00
↓

Spagetti
§ ©ª 12
Status Icons
• Communication: §
• Master/BM error: ¶
• Cut off Master or BM: ß

•20.00
•76.50

Items sold

Consecutive number

Scroll area

Current transaction amount/change

Total amount

• Receipt on: ©
• Character shift:
Double size: ª
Standard size: π

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-13

Hardware Configuration
1-4-3.

Menu level display part contents

SHIFT PLU 1

Menu shift 1

Shift PLU level (1 ~ 8)

1-4-4.

Menu shift (1 ~ 15)

2nd@
2nd unit Price level (1 ~ 2)

Main display brightness control

LAN

DISPLAY

COM3
COM6

SCANNER
COM2
COM5

PC/MODEM

COM1
COM4

Brightness control

1-5.

Cash drawer
In case of connecting drawer, follow the procedure below.
Connect the drawer.
1. Connect drawer connector (three color lead on drawer) to the terminal.
2. Connect frame drawer connector (green lead on drawer) to the terminal.
Mount the cash register.
1. Screw in 2 fixing screws bottom side of the terminal.
2. Mount the terminal on the top of the drawer, ensuring that the feet on the bottom of the
terminal go into the holes on the drawer.

R-14

1-6.

Input/output connectors
Power switch
Main power switch is located in the power switch cover.

Power switch

Input /output connectors
Inline connector, COM port, and drawer cable are located in the backside connector cover.

Bottom side of the terminal

PS/2 Keyboard

Inline (10/100Base-T)

LAN

DISPLAY

AC Adaptor

SCANNER

PC/MODEM

PS/2
KEYBOARD

COM3

COM2
COM5

COM6

Brightness

COM3

COM6

QT-6600 Reference Manual

COM2

COM1
COM4

COM5

SPK

COM1

MIC

COM4

Drawer 2
Drawer 1

Ext. microphone
Ext. speaker

R-15

Hardware Configuration
1-7.

Optional peripherals
The following optional peripherals can be used by plugging them into the appropriate port.
1) Personal computer / MODEM: RS-232C COM 1 port
2) Scanner: RS-232C COM 2 port
Hand-held scanner, Fixed scanner
3) Slip printer: RS-232C COM 2 port
SP-1300
In case of installing both scanner and slip printer, connect slip to COM 4, 5 port.
If you connect the slip printer to COM 4 , the automatic detection during INIT does not
performed. You muse program the I/O parameter manually.
4) Remote display: RS-232C COM 3 port
QT-6060D
5) Remote printer (UP-400/360): RS-232C COM 4 ~ 6 port
The remote printer is used for reports/kitchen orders/receipts.
6) Inline: Inline port
You can use CAT5 UTP cable.
7 Drawer: drawer port
8) CF card: CF card slot (in the card slot cover)
9) PS-2 keyboard (Microsoft Wired Keyboard RT2300): PS-2 keyboard port

R-16

1-8.

System configuration
This section represents the system configuration of the QT-6600. The QT-6600 have four
different system configurations, such as 1. Shared check tracking/ floating clerk interrupt
system, 2. Inline collection/ consolidation system, 3. Online collection/ consolidation
system, and 4. Online collection/ consolidation system (use FTP feature).
Before detail explanation, we should define the words:
1) Check master:
Check master is the master server of shared check tracking system and floating clerk
interrupt system. This terminal has check index and detail files and controls them.
2) Check backup master:
Check backup master is the backup server of shared check tracking system and floating
clerk interrupt system. This terminal also has check index and detail files and update
them at the same timing of master.
When the check master goes down, the backup master plays the role of check master.
3) Check self master:
Check self master has its check tracking system files and clerk interrupt files for itself.
4) Satellite:
The terminal which is not assigned to 1) ~ 3) above.
5) Remote printer (via RS-232C or LAN):
Remote printer prints data sent from both its own terminal and other terminal of the
system.
6) Local printer:
Local printer prints data sent from its own terminal.
1-9-1. Shared check tracking system/floating clerk interrupt system
System Recommendation
Up to 16 remote printers
LAN Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2)

C
C

RS-232C Printer

C
C

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

C
C

inline

C
C

CHK/BM

CHK/M

Slip
Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-17

Hardware Configuration
Available peripherals versus ECR definition
✓: Available
ECR definition

Remote
printer

Check master
Check backup master
Self master
Satellite

✔
✔
✔
✔

Peripherals
Slip
PC/
printer MODEM
✔
✔
✔
✔

✔
✔
✔
✔

Available combinations ECR definition
✓: Available
ECR definition
Check master
Check backup master
Self master
Terminal w/ remote printer

Check
master

×
×
✔

Check
backup
master

Self
master

Terminal
w/ remote
printer

×
×

✔
✔
✔

×
✔

✔

Note:
1) Please follow the system recommendation above. Otherwise the system performance
may be slow down.

R-18

1-8-2. Inline collection/consolidation system
• Inline collection/consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

PC
Via COM 1 port of the master terminal
or Inline (wire or wireless)

C
C

Maximum 32 terminals

1-8-3. Online collection / consolidation system
• Online collection / consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

PC
on-line (Public / Private Telephone line)

C
C

Maximum 32 terminals

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-19

Hardware Configuration
1-8-4. Online collection / consolidation system (use FTP feature)
• Online collection / consolidation and auto-programming for up to 32 terminals.

ADSL/FTTH
MODEM

Internet

ADSL/FTTH
MODEM VPN rooter

VPN rooter

C
C

Maximum 32 terminals

R-20

C
C

2.
Application systems ............................................................................ R-23
2-1. General description of application system ....................................... R-23
2-1-1.
2-1-2.
2-1-3.
2-1-4.
2-1-5.
2-1-6.
2-1-7.

File concept................................................................................................... R-23
Linkage of totalizers ...................................................................................... R-24
Function keys ................................................................................................ R-25
Keyboard layout ............................................................................................ R-25
Mode control ................................................................................................. R-26
Operation prompt and error messages ......................................................... R-26
Printing control system.................................................................................. R-26

2-2. General description of individual function keys ............................... R-29
2-2-1.
2-2-2.
2-2-3.

System keys .................................................................................................. R-29
Finalize keys ................................................................................................. R-30
Transaction keys ........................................................................................... R-30

2-3. Remote printer control ........................................................................ R-39
2-3-1.
2-3-2.
2-3-3.
2-3-4.

Remote printer system configuration ............................................................ R-39
Remote printer control setting ....................................................................... R-40
Remote printer output control ....................................................................... R-41
Remote printer backup processes ................................................................ R-41

2-4. Check tracking system ........................................................................ R-44
2-4-1.
2-4-2.
2-4-3.

Shared check tracking system ...................................................................... R-44
Shared check tracking requirement .............................................................. R-45
Data backup when the master goes down .................................................... R-45

2-5. Other check tracking system control ................................................. R-46
2-5-1.
2-5-2.
2-5-3.

The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization .................... R-46
Table transfer ................................................................................................ R-46
Store and recall ............................................................................................. R-46

2-6. Clerk control function ......................................................................... R-48
2-6-1.
2-6-2.
2-6-3.
2-6-4.

Clerk interrupt ............................................................................................... R-48
Clerk detail memory ...................................................................................... R-49
Clerk training ................................................................................................. R-49
Manager mode control .................................................................................. R-49

2-7. Arrangement key function and scheduler ......................................... R-51
2-7-1.
2-7-2.
2-7-3.

Arrangement key function ............................................................................. R-51
Arrangement program example .................................................................... R-55
Scheduled execution of arrangement function .............................................. R-55

2-8. Making graphic logo ............................................................................ R-56
2-8-1.
2-8-2.

About graphic logo ........................................................................................ R-56
Making graphic logo procedure ..................................................................... R-56

2-9. Hourly item ........................................................................................... R-57
2-9-1.

Programming necessary files before using hourly item function. .................. R-57

2-10. Time and attendance ........................................................................... R-58
2-10-1.
2-10-2.
2-10-3.

Corresponding relations of the file ................................................................ R-59
Clock-in operation ......................................................................................... R-62
Clock-out operation ....................................................................................... R-65

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-21

Application System
2-11. Sign on control .................................................................................... R-68
2-11-1.
2-11-2.
2-11-3.
2-11-4.

Sign on .......................................................................................................... R-68
Solution to abnormality of master terminal ................................................... R-69
Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal .................................................. R-69
Sign on compulsory ...................................................................................... R-69

2-12. IDC (Item Data Capture) ...................................................................... R-70
2-12-1.
2-12-2.
2-12-3.
2-12-4.
2-12-5.
2-12-6.

Available capturing items .............................................................................. R-70
Set up the IDC start / end ............................................................................. R-73
How to memorize the captured items ........................................................... R-74
IDC data file structure ................................................................................... R-75
IDC data type ................................................................................................ R-81
Transferring IDC ............................................................................................ R-82

2-13. Electronic journal ................................................................................ R-83
2-13-1.
2-13-2.
2-13-3.
2-13-4.

Storing electronic journal .............................................................................. R-83
Issuing electronic journal report .................................................................... R-83
Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after salesR-83
Transferring electronic journal memory ......................................................... R-84

2-14. Simple time and attendance ............................................................... R-85
2-14-1.
2-14-2.
2-14-3.
2-14-4.

Clock-in operation ......................................................................................... R-85
Clock-out operation ....................................................................................... R-86
Worktime display ........................................................................................... R-86
Report ........................................................................................................... R-86

2-15. Magnetic card reading ......................................................................... R-87

R-22

Application systems
This section describes the configuration of application system and their related setting with
the QT-6600. Reading this section provides a general understanding of the overall system
of the terminal.

2-1. General description of application system
2-1-1. File concept
Programming data for each function, as well as registration data, are assigned and handled
in the RAM of the terminal in data blocks called files. Each files identified by a 3-digit file
number consists of multiple records.
Memory management on a file basis allows flexibility memory allocation in accordance
with the application of a specific terminal. The number of records per file can be
programmed, and a file can even be programmed for zero records.
There are three types of files:
– Terminal files:
Terminal files include system work files, daily total files, periodic total 1, periodic total
2 files, buffer files, and program files. Periodic total files have only totalizer field, and
totalize the same data which is accumulated to terminal files at the same time. The
periodic total 1 files have 100 order file numbers, and the periodic total 2 files have 200
order file numbers.
These files can be reset individually and separately from the terminal files. This
provides access to weekly and monthly total data. The periodic total 1 files and 2 files
have the same functions, and can accumulate data with different periods. The same
number of records as the corresponding terminal file must be reserved for each periodic
total files.
– Consolidation files:
Consolidation files are work files for consolidation of daily total, periodic 1 total and
periodic 2 total data from each terminal, and have 300, 400 and 500 order file numbers,
respectively. The same number of records as the corresponding terminal files must be
reserved for each file, on the master terminal.
– Consolidation work files:
Consolidation work files are work files for collection/consolidation of daily, periodic
1/2 data from each terminal. The files have 600 order file numbers.
The file number of records as the corresponding terminal file must be reserved for each
consolidation file.
Each file requires an internal work area, so calculation of actual file size can be performed
using the following formula:
Record length × Number of records + Work area = Actual file size
The table on the page 18 ~ 22 of the programming manual shows all the files available for
the terminal. See the Appendix A-2 of this manual for detail formats of individual files.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-23

Application System
2-1-2. Linkage of totalizers
Registered data is accumulated to totalizers which are reserved for each functions.
The QT-6600 has the following types of totalizers:
1) Fixed totalizers
Registration data is accumulated for individual terminals.
2) Function key totalizers
Data input by finalize or transaction keys is accumulated in totalizers for each key.
Operation types, as well as data used in operation differ depending on the key.
3) Subdepartment totalizers
Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each subdepartment.
4) Department totalizers
Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each department.
5) Group totalizers
Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each group.
6) PLU/ scanning PLU totalizers
Registration data is accumulated in totalizers for each PLU/ scanning PLU.
7) Clerk totalizers
Registration data is accumulated for each relevant clerk. A clerk detail totalizer can be
linked to a fix totalizer, finalize key, transaction key, or item totalizer (department /
PLU / subdepartment / group), and accumulate data registered for the destination
totalizer of each relevant clerk.
8) Other totalizer
Functions for hourly sales, monthly sales void reason, table analysis, time attendance
and hourly item etc. also have totalizers.
Registration data flow

Registration
Calculation
*2
*1
Fixed totalizer

Function key
totalizer

R-24

PLU file
Scanning PLU file

*1
Subdept. file

*1
Dept. file

Group file

Clerk detail file

Other file

Linking between PLUs/ scanning PLUs, subdepartments, departments and groups can
be programmed to meet the needs of the retail environment.
PLUs/ scanning PLUs can be programmed to link with subdepartments, departments
or group, while subdepartment can be programmed to link with department or group,
and department can be programmed to link with group.
When a PLU is programmed to link with a department, data registered for the PLU is
also accumulated to the department. In addition, when the department is programmed
to link with a group, data registered for the PLU is simultaneously reflected the
department totalizer and group totalizer.
When data is registered to a totalizer which is preset in the clerk detail link table, the
data is also accumulated to the clerk detail totalizer reserved for each relevant clerk.

2-1-3. Function keys
The keys on the keyboard can be assigned various functions that are used for registration
as required for the terminal. For convenience sake, these functions are called by function
keys.
There are two types of function keys:
1) System keys
Numeric keys, clear key, home position key, end key, left / right / up / down arrow keys,
yes key, no key, mode selection keys, ESC/SKIP key, page up / down key are system
keys.
2) Function keys
These function keys are used for finalize a transaction, to specify the functions for a
registration or to specify the meaning of a entry. These function keys have programmable functions, which are set to the transaction key / department / subdepartment /
PLU file.
Function keys include finalize key, transaction key, department key, subdepartment
key and flat PLU key.
The list of all function keys is shown in the Program 4 chapter of the programming manual.
General descriptions of individual function keys are found in the chapter 2-2.

2-1-4. Keyboard layout
Normally, the keyboard is assigned functions which are required for registration of
transactions. The keyboard is also used for character input when entering descriptors or
names during programming.
The QT-6600 automatically switches the keyboard to its character input function when it
determines that character input is required for the operation sequence you are performing.
This means that you can input characters without having to worry about manually changing
the keyboard input mode.
The function key (except system keys) allocation is fully programmable to meet the
specific needs of each terminal. The actual programming of key layouts can be performed
in the PGM4 mode, and programmed data is written onto the key table (file 074/174).
The allocation can also be programmed when programming each function file for
programming function keys such as finalize keys, transaction keys, department keys,
subdepartment keys, and flat PLU keys.
Standard function key layout
Refer to the page 16 of the user’s manual.
Character key layout
Refer to the page 126, 127 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-25

Application System
2-1-5. Mode control
With the QT-6600, each clerk can be programmed to enable or disable operations in the
following modes:
– REF mode
– REG– mode
– REG mode
– X/Z mode
– Program 1 ~ 6 mode
– Manager mode
– Inline X/Z mode
– Inline auto program
– CF backup / restore mode
Also, each clerk can be programmed to enable or disable operations of every function key.
Though the terminal has no actual REG 2 mode, on the page 49 in the Clerk Control
function chapter of this manual, the manager control procedure is described.
Arrangement execution mode programmed in the arrangement key ignores the mode
control program by the clerk.
Please note that if a clerk want to operate an arrangement, he / she should allow to operate
arrangement function.

2-1-6. Operation prompt and error messages
The QT-6600 displays messages to indicate the status of the terminal being operated or
programmed. These messages help to determine the status of the terminal or the required
subsequent action.
2-1-6-1. Operation prompt
Refer to the page 227 of this manual for details. These messages cannot be added, modified
or deleted.
2-1-6-2. Error messages
Refer to the page 224 ~ 227 of this manual for details. Error messages are displayed to
indicate that an error has occurred and a compulsory operation must be performed. All error
messages cannot be added, modified or deleted.

2-1-7. Printing control system
The following describes the control system for printing of receipts, the journal, validation,
slips and X/Z reports.
2-1-7-1. Receipt print control during normal registration
Normally, the receipt is printed to reflect the details of a registration as it is performed, with
the receipt being issued with the finalize operation. By using the
key, the receipt issuance status can be turned off to suspend printing and issuance of
receipts when so desired. Pressing the key turns the receipt
issuance status on or off, and when the receipt issuance status is On, the icon “RECEIPT
ON” appears.
The following programming can be performed for receipt printing:

R-26

Description
Receipt “Item consolidation”
Receipt “Sort by group, department”
Print consecutive number on the receipt
Print date / time on the receipt
Vertical double character
Set menu detail on guest / slip
Print PLU number
Print finalized total
Print taxable amount
Print taxable status
Print total number of item sold
Print customer number (number of covers)
One line feed after finalization
Time format (24H / 12H)

Program location
PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature
PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature
PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature
PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature
PGM3; Machine Control3 in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature
PGM3; Print Control in General Feature

2-1-7-2. Validation print control
The QT-6600 allows use of the slip printer (SP-1300) for validation printing of item
registrations, function registrations and sales totals. To perform validation printing, insert
the validation paper into the slip printer, and then press the key
(function code 037).
The following desctription shows the print format for validation performed using the slip
printer.
There are three general types of validation printing:
1) Finalization validation
2) Transaction validation
3) Item validation
Finalization validation is performed following finalization operations with finalize keys.
When a validation is performed following receipt issuance, the sales total or tendered
amount is printed, while partial tendering, the tendered amount for the specified medium
is printed.
Transaction validation is valid for the following function keys:
– Received on account, Paid out, finalization of Pick up or Loan, Check cashing, Minus,
Plus, Discount, Premium, Void, Coupon, Coupon2, Tip, Deposit, Subtotal, Merchandise subtotal keys
You can program the allowable number of validation printings or multiple validation
printing status for the above listed keys.
Also some of these keys can be programmed as validation compulsory, this means that
registration is not permitted until the validation of the former registration has been
performed.
Item validation is performed directly following an item registration listed below.
– Departments
– Subdepartments
– PLUs/ scanning PLUs
You can program the multiple validation printing status for above items.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-27

Application System
2-1-7-3. Slip print control
Connection of an optional slip printer (SP-1300) to the QT-6600 makes it possible to print
transaction details on a slip.
To print a slip, insert a slip paper into the printer, and adjust paper position by entering the
number of printed lines and pressing the key (function code
056) or the key (function code 054) and then press the
key (function code 055). Or it is possible to find the appropriate slip
printing start line automatically.
After printing a slip, the paper is automatically released.
If the paper is not released for some reasons, press or to release the paper.
Before using slip printer, you should program the maximum lines of slip.
The following two sections are other features to control slip printing format:
2-1-7-4. Endorsement message print control
The QT-6600 allows printing of endorsement messages on the slip printer (SP-1300) for
check registrations. To perform endorsement message printing, insert the paper into the
slip printer following finalization using the key or check cashing transaction
using the key, and press the following key:
– Endorsement key (function code 039)
Check key and check cashing key can be programmed for compulsory endorsement print.
The endorsement message contents should be programmed into the endorsement message
file (file 033).
2-1-7-5. Check printing print control
The QT-6600 allows printing check tendered amount on a check inserted into the slip
printer. To perform check printing, insert the paper into the slip printer following check
finalization using the key, and press the following key:
– Check print key (function code 012)
Check key can be programmed for compulsory check print. The check printing format is
controlled by the check print file (file 041).
2-1-7-6. X/Z report print control
The QT-6600 can output a report in the read (X) or reset (Z) mode. The following shows
the programming for X/Z print controls:
Description
Items on the fixed totalizer report
Items zero skip
Average spend/item on monthly report
PLU order (memory / random code)
Print / Non print PLU No. on PLU report
Print / Non print Sales ratio
Print / Non print Z counter
Print / Non print Item discount totalizer
Print GT

R-28

Program location
PGM3; Report Control1 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature
PGM3; Report Control2 in General Feature

2-2. General description of individual function keys
This section describes individual function key that can be assigned to the keys on the
keyboard of QT-6600.

2-2-1. System keys
The system key consist on a non-programmable function key.
The following system keys are available.
1) Numeric keys (0, 1 ~ 9, 00, decimal point*)
These keys are used for inputting numerical data such as PLU codes, amounts, quantities,
etc. These keys must be allocated on the keyboard.
2) Clear key
This key is used for clearing numerical values after they have been input, and after incorrect
function keys have been pressed. This key also can be used to clear errors. This key must
be allocated on the keyboard.
3) Home position key*
This key is used for returning cursor to the home position.
4) End key*
This key is used for moving cursor to the bottom position.
5) Left, right, up, down arrow keys
These keys are used for moving the cursor.
6) Yes key
This key is used for consenting the selection and proceeding steps.
7) No key
This key is used for cancelling the selection and proceeding steps.
8) Mode key
This key is used for changing modes of the terminal. This key shows the allowable mode
keys in the mode pop-up window.
9) ESC/SKIP key
This key is used for terminating a programming sequence, X/Z sequence, and returning the
former window. This key is also used for terminating a report being issued in PGM, X, and
Z mode.
10) Display on/off key
This key is used for turning on / off the terminal.
11) Page up key*
This key is used for turning the window forwards.
12) Page down key*
This key is used for turning the window backwards.
* Allocatable key

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-29

Application System
2-2-2. Finalize keys

This section covers the general description of each finalize key, with its respective options.
Finalize keys have programmable functions which may be used as required.
Tender key
This key is used for finalizing transactions. Up to six media in drawer totalizers are
reserved in the fixed totalizer file, and cash key is linked to cash in drawer, charge key to
charge in drawer, check key to check in drawer and credit key to credit in drawer, food
stamp tender key to food stamp in drawer, EBT tender key to EBT in drawer.
When this key is pressed, the total amount of the transaction is calculated. Normally, a
receipt is issued and the drawer opens at the same time. The total amount is added to the
appropriate totalizers and counters, with consecutive numbers being increased by one.
When an amount exceeding the sales amount is received, the change is calculated,
displayed and printed on the receipt.
This key can also be used in combination with other finalize keys for partial tender and can
also be used to specify the type of media during loan, pick up or media change operation.
Programmability: Refer to page 94, 96 of the programming manual.
New balance key
This key is used for adding the latest registered total amount to the previous balance to
obtain a new balance.
When this key is pressed, the total amount of the transaction is calculated. Normally, a
receipt is issued.
Programmability: Refer to page 95 of the programming manual.

2-2-3. Transaction keys

1)
2)
3)

R-30

Each of the transaction keys have programmable functions which may be used as required.
The general description of each transaction key, with individual options, is outlined on the
following sections.
Price inquiry key (Function code 008)
This key is used to confirm the price and descriptors of PLU without registering.
Stock inquiry key (Function code 009)
This key is used to confirm the stock quantity and descriptors of PLU without registering.
Text recall key (Function code 010)
This key is used to recall characters.
Programmability: Refer to page 97 of the programming manual.
Text print key (Function code 011)
This key is used to print the entered characters.
Programmability: Refer to page 97 of the programming manual.
Check print key (Function code 012)
This key is used to print the check on the slip printer (SP-1300). Pressing this key allows
the selection from the following list to print on a check.
1. Check amount in Arabic numerals (normal size / double size)
2. Date (normal size / double size)
3. Check print message in the check endorsement message file
This item noted above can be arranged into a check print format according to the needs
of the store. Check printing using this key is valid only for the following operation of the
check key.
Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.
Clerk transfer key (Function code 013)
This key is used to transfer opened checks to another clerk.
Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.

10)

11)

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

17)

Table transfer key (Function code 014)
This key is used to transfer the contents of a receipt to another check.
Programmability: Refer to page 98 of the programming manual.
Tip key (Function code 015)
This key is used to register tips.
Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.
Normal receipt key (Function code 016)
This key is used to change the order status from Bon to normal and from single item sales
to normal.
Loan key (Function code 019)
This key inputs the amount of money provided for making change. This operation affects
media totals, rather than sales totals.
Loans are made for all types of money which can be specified by finalize keys.
Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.
Received on account key (Function code 020)
This key is used to register amounts received for purposes other than sales transactions.
This transaction affects media totals, rather than sales totals.
Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.
Paid out/Euro key (Function code 021)
This key is used to register amounts of paid outs from the terminal. This transaction affects
media totals, rather than sales totals. If the terminal has the file 099 (Euro program file),
this key also works as “Euro” key. Euro key has the following features: (1) Converting the
main currency to the sub currency, when registering a subtotal amount. (2) Specifying sub
currency while entering an amount for payment.
Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.
Pick up key (Function code 022)
When sales receipts are removed from the drawer or when the amount in-drawer exceeds
the limit value (sentinel function), the manager performs a pick up operation. This key is
used for this function. This operation affects media totals, rather than sales totals.
Pick ups are made for all types of money which can be specified by finalize keys.
Programmability: Refer to page 99 of the programming manual.
Coupon key (Function code 023)
This key is used for registering coupons. This operation affects the coupon amount in the
coupon totalizers. The registered coupon amounts is not deducted from the department,
PLU or gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)
Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.
Deposit key (Function code 025)
This key is used to register deposits.
Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.
Minus key (Function code 027)
This key is used to register subtraction. This operation affects the subtraction amount in
the minus key totalizers. The registered amounts is not deducted from the department, PLU
or gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)
Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.
Discount key (Function code 028)
This key applies a preset % or manual input % to obtain the discount amount for the last
registered item or subtotal. The registered amount is not deducted from the department,
PLU or gross totalizers but from the net totalizers only. (Selecting GROSS specification)
Programmability: Refer to page 102 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-31

Application System
18) Plus key (Function code 029)
This key is used for registering surcharge. This operation affects the surcharge amount in
the plus key totalizers. The registered amounts is not added to the department, PLU or gross
totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)
Programmability: Refer to page 100 of the programming manual.
19) Premium key (Function code 030)
This key applies a preset % or manual input % to obtain the premium amount for the last
registered item or subtotal.The registered amounts is not added to the department, PLU or
gross totalizers, but from the net totalizers only. (selecting GROSS specification)
Programmability: Refer to page 102 of the programming manual.
20) Refund key (Function code 033)
This key declares next input for a return money.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
21) Error correct/Void key (Function code 034)
This key is used to correct the last registered item, discount, premium, partial tendered, etc.
This key also invalidates proceeding data registered for departments subdepartments,
PLUs or set menus only.
Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.
22) Coupon 2 key (Function code 036)
This key is used to register coupons. The registered coupon amounts is deducted from the
department, subdepartment, PLU or gross totalizers and the net totalizers.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
23) Validation key (Function code 037)
This key validates item or transaction amounts on slips. Validation can be made compulsory
for certain function keys. Multiple validation can be prohibited for certain function keys.
24) Receipt key (Function code 038)
This key issues a receipt for the last transaction (post-finalization receipt) when the original
receipt is not issued. This key also issues a guest receipt. The guest receipt can be
designated by seat number.
Programmability: Refer to page 103 of the programming manual.
25) Check endorsement key (Function code 039)
This key is used to print a preset check endorsement using the slip printer.
Programmability: Refer to page 101 of the programming manual.
26) Non-add key (Function code 040)
This key prints reference numbers (personal check number, card number etc.)
Programmability: Refer to page 104 of the programming manual.
27) Non-add / No sale key (Function code 041)
This key prints reference numbers (personal check number, card number etc.)
This key also opens the drawer between transaction.
Programmability: Refer to page 104 of the programming manual.
28) No sale key (Function code 042)
This key opens the drawer between transaction.
29) Number of customer key (Function code 043)
This key registers the number of customers.
Programmability: Refer to page 105 of the programming manual.

R-32

30) Arrangement key (Function code 044)
This key is used to activate an arrangement program programmed in the arrangement
file. Any operation that can be performed from the keyboard, as well as mode, can be
programmed in an arrangement program, and can be performed merely by pressing this
key.
The mode control function of this key can be programmed for all modes.
Programmability: Refer to page 105 of the programming manual.
31) Currency exchange key (Function code 045)
This key converts foreign currency to local currency or vice versa using the exchange rate
preset for the key and displays the result.
This key is used for conversions of a home currency subtotal or merchandise subtotal to
equivalent of another country's currency.
This key is also used for conversion of another country's currency payment to the equivalent
of the home currency.
Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.
32) VAT key (Function code 046)
This key is used to print VAT breakdowns.
33) Bill copy key (Function code 047)
This key is used to issue bill copy.
34) PLU number key (Function code 048)
This key is used to enter PLU numbers.
35) Price key (Function code 049)
This key is used in the following transactions to enter a unit price.
– Open department registration
– Subdepartment registration using the subdepartment number key
– Open PLU registration
In case of the registration mentioned above, the Price key is pressed after entering the unit
price to override a unit price preset to the department, subdepartment or PLU. If the preset
price is to be registered as it is, simply press the Price key.
36) Department key (Function code 051)
This key is used to register items for a department.
Programmability: Refer to page 91 of the programming manual.
37) Slip back feed / Release key (Function code 054)
This key is used to back feed slips inserted into the slip printer. This is done by specifying
the number of feed lines. This key is also used to release the slip paper holder if numbers
are not entered.
38) Slip print key (Function code 055)
This key is used to execute a slip printing on the slip printer. Pressing this key prints the sales
details. Actual printing is performed following receipt issuance.
Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.
39) Slip feed / Release key (Function code 056)
This key is used to feed slips inserted into the slip printer. This is done by specifying the
number of feed lines. This key is also used to release the slip paper holder if numbers are
not entered.
40) Tax status shift key (Function code 057)
This key activates tax table which is specified by the tax status programmed for this key.
The tax status is programmed for the departments, subdepartments, PLUs, scanning PLU,
minus, plus, discount and premium keys. Pressing this key during registration converts
taxable item to non taxable, and non taxable item to taxable.
Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-33

Application System
41) Table number key (Function code 058)
This key is used to input table numbers.
42) Food stamp status shift key (Function code 059)
The food stamp status is programmed for the departments, subdepartments, PLUs, minus,
plus, discount and premium keys. Pressing this key during registration converts food
stampable item to non stampable, and non stampable item to stampable.
43) Declaration key (Function code 061)
This key is used to declare cash, check in drawer amount by media. After pressing this key,
input the in drawer amount by media, and press media key. Press this key to terminate the
procedure. The declared amount, in drawer amount and the difference are printed on the
fixed total report.
Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.
44) Tax exempt key (Function code 062)
This key is used to change taxable amounts to nontaxable amounts.
Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.
45) Flat PLU key (Function code 063)
This key is used to register items to flat PLU.
Programmability: Refer to page 88 of the programming manual.
46) Menu shift key (Function code 064)
This key is used to shift PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 15) menu.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
47) Shift PLU key (Function code 065)
This key is used to shift a Flat PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 8) level.
Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.
48) Open key (Function code 067)
This key is used to release the maximum amount limit or low digit limit (programmable)
for an amount which exceeds the limit.
Programmability: Refer to page 107 of the programming manual.
49) Open 2 key (Function code 068)
This key is used to suspend the compulsory specifications.
Programmability: Refer to page 107 of the programming manual.
50) First unit price key (Function code 069)
This key is used to register a specific PLU at the first unit price.
51) Second unit price key (Function code 070)
This key is used to register a specific PLU at the second unit price.
52) Clerk number key (Function code 072)
This key is used to assign a clerk’s secret number.
Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.
53) Operator read / reset key (Function code 073)
This key is used to issue a clerk’s individual X/Z report.
Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.
54) Tray total key (Function code 074)
This key is used to obtain the sectional subtotal amount.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
55) Subtotal key (Function code 075)
This key is used to obtain subtotal amount with add-on tax and previous balance.
Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.

R-34

56) Receipt On / Off key (Function code 076)
This key is used to change the status “Receipt issue” or “No receipt.”
57) Taxable amount subtotal key (Function code 077)
This key is used to obtain taxable amount subtotal.
Programmability: Refer to page 106 of the programming manual.
58) Operator number key (Function code 078)
This key is used to enter a clerk number during clerk transfer.
59) Merchandise subtotal key (Function code 080)
This key is used to obtain subtotal excluding the add-on tax amount and the previous
balance.
Programmability: Refer to page 108 of the programming manual.
60) Food stamp subtotal key (Function code 081)
This key is used to obtain food stamp subtotal. This key should be pressed just before
or finalization.
61) Multiplication key (Function code 082)
This key is used for inputting a quantity of items for a multiplication operation. The
maximum quantity that can be registered with this key is 4 integer and 3 decimals. An error
occurs if the result exceeds 8 digits, including the minus sign.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
62) Quantity / For key (Function code 083)
This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also
has a split pricing function. The function is used to calculate the price per unit for particular
items, which are sold in bulk in order to obtain the total amount for the number of units
purchased.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
63) Square key (Function code 084)
This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also
has a square multiplication function.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
64) Selective item subtotal key (Function code 085)
This key is used to obtain the selective item 1 / 2 subtotal amount.
In addition to the common programming, this key has the following option:
– Selective item status 1 / 2
65) Tare key (Function code 087)
This key is used to input tare value for scale registration.
66) Scale key (Function code 088)
This key is used to read weight from the electronic scale or enter weighing value manually.
67) Cube key (Function code 090)
This key provides the same functions as the multiplication key. In addition, this key also
has a cube multiplication function.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
68) New check key (Function code 091)
This key is used in a check tracking system to input a new check number in order to open
a new check under that number.
Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-35

Application System
69) Old check key (Function code 092)
This key is used in a check tracking system to input the number of an existing check
(previously created by the New check key) whose details are stored in the check tracking
memory. Existing checks are reopened to perform further registration or to finalize them.
Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.
70) New / Old check key (Function code 093)
This key is used in a check tracking system to input check numbers in order to open new
checks and to reopen existing checks. When the clerk inputs a check number, the terminal
checks to see if that number already exists in the check tracking memory. If there is no
matching number in the memory, a new check is opened under the input number. If the
check number input matches a number already stored in the memory, that check is
reopened for further registration or finalization.
Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.
71) Add check key (Function code 094)
This key is used in a check tracking system to combine the details of more than one check
into a single check.
72) Separate check key (Function code 095)
This key is used in a check tracking system to separate selected items or to separate by seat
number from one check to another check.
73) Room number key (Function code 100)
This key is used to recall the customer’s information from the hotel server by room
number..
74) Room message key (Function code 101)
This key is used to display/ print the message for the designated customer.
75) OBR (Optical Barcode Reader) key (Function code 103)
This key is used to enter scanning PLU code manually.
76) Price change key (Function code 104)
This key is used to change the item price of scanning PLU in registering.
Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.
77) Clock-in/out key (Function code 108)
This key is used to register the time when employees start/finish their job.
Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.
78) Break-in / out key (Function code 109)
This key is used to register the starting / finishing time when employees have a recess.
Programmability: Refer to page 110 of the programming manual.
79) Coupon number key (Function code 110)
This key is used to enter coupon number for registering mix and match discount.
Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.
80) Substitution key (Function code 111)
Replaces group PLU with a PLU not preset in the pulldown menu.
81) Ketten Bon key (Function code 113)
This key is used to enter quantities for multiplication. Multiplication by this key issues
singular order prints.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
82) House Bon key (Function code 114)
This key is used to register items for in-store use.

R-36

83) Post entry key (Function code 115)
This key is used in a check tracking or clerk interrupt system to indicate the reserved item
of set menu and register it as a fixed item later on.
– Enter post entry
Press this key while the window is opened, the key descriptor appears on the screen and
it is registered as a reserved item.
– Fix post entry
After finishing the set menu registration, move the cursor on to the reserved item, press
this key again, then the appropriate window will be opened to fix it.
84) Round repeat key (Function code 116)
This key is used to register the same items which were ordered just before.
Programmability: Refer to page 112 of the programming manual.
85) Open check key (Function code 117)
This key is used to issue an open check report of an assigned clerk.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
86) Media change key (Function code 118)
This key is used to change media in drawer amounts. Pressing this key enters media change
operation.
87) Seat number key (Function code 119)
This key is used to enter and print seat number.
88) Eat-in key (Function code 128)
This key is used to specify if the customer eats in the restaurant. Before closing a
transaction, press this key.
Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.
89) Takeout key (Function code 129)
This key is used to specify if the customer takes out items. Before closing a transaction,
press this key for the tax exemption.
Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.
90) Store key (Function code 130)
This key is used for storing the check number of the registered items. Allocate this key to
the terminal at the drive-through entrance. When this key is pressed, registered item data
will be stored, and then these data will transfer to the youngest check number.
Programmability: Refer to page 111 of the programming manual.
91) Recall key (Function code 131)
This key is used for recalling the transferred check number by the store key. When you
press this key, the check number will appear in order of the oldest record.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
92) Subdepartment key (Function code 133)
This key is used to register items for the subdepartment.
Programmability: Refer to page 90 of the programming manual.
93) Subdepartment number key (Function code 134)
This key is used to enter subdepartment numbers.
94) Department number key (Function code 135)
This key is used to enter department numbers.
95) List key (Function code 136)
This key is used to display menu lists.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
96) List number key (Function code 137)
This key is used to designate list number.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-37

Application System
97) Number look up key (Function code 138)
This key is used to register a scanning PLU item whose scanning code is set to this key.
98) Split payment (Dutch account) key (Function code 140)
This key is used to share the total payment by customer.
Programmability: Refer to page 113 of the programming manual.
99) Not found PLU key (Function code 142)
This key is used to declare an item which has not been set in the scanning PLU file yet as
not found PLU item. After occuring “Error 028”, press this key and perform linked
department registration.
100)Customer number key (Function code 148)
This key is used to enter customer ID number.
Programmability: Refer to page 115 of the programming manual.
101)Payment key (Function code 149)
This key is used to declare the following transactions as payment.
102)Swipe key (Function code 172)
This key is used to enter before swiping a magnetic card/ scanning a barcode.
Programmability: Refer to page 116 of the programming manual.
103)Electronic journal display key (Function code 207)
This key is used to display the stored journal.
104)Display mode key (Function code 219)
This key is used to change display modes (normal mode/item consolidation mode).
105)Cancel key (Function code 236)
Invalidates all preceding data registered for departments, PLUs and set menus within a
transaction. This key must be pressed before the transaction involving the data to be
invalidated is finalized. It is also effective even after calculation of subtotal amount.
Programmability: Refer to page 109 of the programming manual.
106)Worktime key (Function code 237)
This key is used to clock-in/ out in simple time and attendance operation.
Programmability: Refer to page 116 of the programming manual.
107)Item search key (Function code 246)
Use this key to search an item by its name, pulldown group or flat-PLU.
Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.
108)Order character change key (Function code 252)
This key is used to change the order character temporarily. The order characters not only
of the item but in the order character table can be printed.
Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.
109)Function list key (Function code 253)
This key is used to display function list. After displaying a function list, you can input the
keys in the list.
Programmability: Refer to page 117 of the programming manual.
110)Location change key (Function code 260)
Use this key to select the pop-up window which shows the table layout of each floor/part
of the restaurant.
Programmability: Refer to page 114 of the programming manual.
111)Table sharing key (Function code 261)
Use this key to assign one table to two or more customer groups.

R-38

2-3. Remote printer control
Up to 16 printers for printing kitchen orders etc.

2-3-1. Remote printer system configuration
Please refer to page 17 for the system configuration.
Up to 16 remote printers
LAN Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2)

C
C

RS-232C Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

C
C

inline

C
C

CHK/M

CHK/BM

Slip
Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

The printing processing of the remote printer is performed as shown in the figure below.

1
QT-6600

QT-6600

Print
buffer

Remote
Printer

RS-232C printer

1 A transaction is made at a terminal.
2 The terminal sends printing data to the terminal with remote printer.
3 The terminal with remote printer sends data to the remote printer.

1
QT-6600

QT-6600

Print
buffer

Remote
Printer

LAN printer

1 A transaction is made at a terminal.
2 The terminal sends printing data to the terminal which controls the remote printer.
3 The terminal which controls the remote printer sends data to the remote printer.
Note: Please do not define more than two terminals controlling one LAN printer.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-39

Application System
2-3-2. Remote printer control setting
Remote printer settings:
After changing the DIP switch configuration, remote printer initialization (power on by
pressing the key) is necessary.

UP-400
Dip switch is located at the bottom of the printer.
SW No.
1
2
3
4
1 5
6
7
8
9
10
SW No.
1
2
3
4
2 5
6
7
8

Function
Reset by DTR
reserved
Protocol
Transmision speed
Parity

OFF

Yes
No
--fixed
DTR/DSR XON/XOFF
See transmission
speed setting

Switch 1
Switch 2

UP-400 Bottom view
Transmission
speed setting

See paritysetting

Busy status
BF full + offline
Low power comsumption
Yes
3mm feed after auto-cut
Invalid

Function
Data reception error
Bit length
Reception buffer full
Set ID/ set IP
Use DHCP server
Set default value
Undefined
Undefined

BF full
No
Valid

OFF

Ignore
7 bit
*1
Set IP
Enable
Yes

Print “?”
8 bit
*2
Set ID
Disable
No

bps
4800
9600
19200
38400

SW No.
4
5
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON

Parity setting

Non
Even
Odd
Non

SW No.
6
7
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON

*1 Until the non-processing data in the reception buffer
decreases from 31 bytes to 21 bytes
*2 Until the room of the reception buffer increases from
1k bytes to 2k bytes
Shadowed parts indicate defaults.

UP-360
Dip switch is located at the bottom of the printer.
SW No.
1
2
3
1 4
5
6
7
8
9
10

R-40

Function
Reset by DTR
reserved
Protocol
Transmision speed

OFF

Yes
No
--fixed
DTR/DSR XON/XOFF
See transmission
speed setting

Parity

See paritysetting

undifined
Low power comsumption
undifined

--Yes
---

--No
---

UP-360 Bottom view
Transmission
speed setting
bps
4800
9600
19200
38400

SW No.
4
5
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON

Parity setting

Non
Even
Odd
Non

SW No.
7
6
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON

Memory allocation of files required when remote printers are connected
• Printer buffer (file 035)
(Reallocate these files, if the file sizes are not enough.)
Other setting
• General machine features

2-3-3. Remote printer output control
The following print items are controlled by programming.
• 0 to 9 line feed above and below printing (only for “order”)
• Dashed line print control (only for “order”)
• Paper auto cut

• Data communication speed (only for RS-232C printer)
• Backup remote printer specification
• Print color (normal / reverse or black / red) control: included in the item programming
(only for “order”)
• Output remote logical order number: included in the item programming
(only for “order”)
• Remote printer output in training mode (only for “order”)
• Item amount printing (only for “order”)
• Alert when remote printer is down

2-3-4. Remote printer backup processes
Remote printer error or terminal with remote printer error
In case of the backup printer is assigned, when the terminal which sends printing data to
remote printer detects the remote printer or the terminal with remote printer abnormality,
the remote printer cross backup (see the next section) is made. In case of no backup printer
is assigned or the backup printer is also downed, the data will be able to display on the
screen.
Remote printer cross backup
When there is more than one remote printer in the system, a setting can be made to enable
remote printer cross backup.
Cross backup (example):
Remote printer 1 backup → Remote printer 2
Remote printer 2 backup → Remote printer 1
or
Remote printer 1 with terminal 1 backup → Remote printer 2 with terminal 2
Remote printer 2 with terminal 2 backup → Remote printer 3 with terminal 1
Note that remote printer backup extends a single level only. If remote printer 1 goes down
in the above example, remote printer 2 performs backup printing. If remote printer 2 now
goes down, remote printer 3 does not take over backup printing.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-41

Application System
Remote printer print sample
1)

Order printing (Normal receipt printing with amount)
Check No.123456
MC #01
— Check number / Machine ID
15-12-2003 12:34
001230 — Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.
REG C01
1 Lemon

Tea

*Soft

•1.00

Drinks*

2 Coffee

— Order with amount
— Order character

•2.00
— Cut

Order printing (Single bon/double bon)
Check No.123456
MC #01
15-12-2003 12:34
001234
REG C01
*Soft
1

Lemon

Drinks*

— Single Bon

Tea
— Cut

MC #01
Check No.123456
REG C01
15-12-2003 12:34
001234

*Soft
2

Drinks*

— Double Bon

Coffee

*STUB*
— Double Bon message
MC #01
— Check number/Machine ID
Check No.123456
REG C01
15-12-2003 12:34
001234 — Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.
*Soft
2

Drinks*

Coffee

Order printing (Normal receipt printing without amount)
Check No.123456
MC #01
15-12-2003 12:34
001256
REG C01
*Soft
1
2
2

R-42

— Order character

Drinks*

Lemon Tea
Coffee
Coffee

Order printing (Set menu/preparation/condiment)
Check No.123456
MC #01
REG C01
15-12-2003 12:34
001267
2
2
2

Steak Set
Medium
Salad

— Set menu
— Detail item

1
1
1
1

Pizza
Soft
Cheese
Tomato

— Main item
— Preparation
— Condiment

Pizza
#123456
Soft
#000001
Cheese
#000002
Tomato
#000003

— Main item
— Main item PLU No.
— Preparation (with quantity / PLU No.)

1
1
1

QT-6600 Reference Manual

— Condiment (with quantity / PLU No.)

R-43

Application System
2-4. Check tracking system
2-4-1. Shared check tracking system
Up to 12 terminals can be included in the cluster and check tracking can be performed for
multiple terminals connected to inline. This means that any terminal can be used to recall
a temporary closed check of one’s cluster for additional registration or finalization.
System configuration (1 cluster system)
Up to 16 remote printers
LAN Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2)

C
C

RS-232C Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2) PRN(3)

C
C

inline

C
C

CHK/M

CHK/BM

Slip
Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals

System configuration (multi cluster system)
Up to 8 remote printers/system (in all cluster)
LAN Printer

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2)

C
C

Order

PRN (1) PRN (2)

C
C

CHK/BM

RS-232C Printer

C
C

CHK/M

C
C

CHK/BM

Slip

Up to 12 QT-6600 terminals/cluster

Up to 32 QT-6600 terminals/system (all cluster total)

R-44

CHK/M

Slip

Satellite

Backup
master

Master

Check
tracking

2 5
3
Shared check tracking processing in one cluster is performed as shown in the figure shown
above.
1 A shared check operation (such as “new check” or “old check” etc.) is made at a
terminal.
2 The terminal sends the check number to the check tracking master and the backup
master. The master and backup master turn on the busy status.
3 The master sends back the check data (if the check number exists) or opens a new check
number.
4 A shared check transaction is finalized (by “new balance” or other finalize key).
5 The terminal sends the check data to the master and the backup master. And the master/
backup master clears the busy status of the check number.

2-4-2. Shared check tracking requirement
The following definition of memory allocation is required in each terminal before you can
perform shared check tracking.
• Number of check tracking tables:
For satellite, minimum one, for master, more than the number of estimated open checks
should be defined.*
*
In case of using the next block **, one more check tracking table is consumed.
• Number of items/tables (per one item block **):
This is not the maximum number of items or functions but the number ordinarily
registered items or functions per one table. If the number of items or functions exceeds
this value during registration, the next block is used automatically for the following
transactions.
**
Number of item blocks:
Ordinarily, the registration requires one item blocks—but in a party for example—more
items are registered per one table. So it is necessary to define how many item blocks can
be used.
The maximum number of items or functions per one check is defined by the formula:
= (Number of items / tables) × (Number of item blocks (1 ~ 10))
When memory near end and memory end happens during registration, an error occurs.
See section A-5. Error messages of this manual.

2-4-3. Data backup when the master goes down
When the system has the backup master for the check tracking system, registered check
tracking data are stored both master and backup master automatically.
As soon as the system detects master down, the backup master roles as master for the check
tracking system.
(It is necessary to switch to backup master manually. See the “System down & Recovery”
chapter on page 9 of the installation & down recovery manual.)
When the system has no backup master for the check tracking system or both master and
backup master become down, no more check tracking operation and clerk interrupt
operation can be made.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-45

Application System
2-5. Other check tracking system control
2-5-1. The timing to clear check detail and index file after finalization
There are two timings to clear detail and index files.
1. The check is cleared after printing finalized data on slip or guest check receipt, or the
check is also cleared when the new or old check operation is made on the terminal
finalized the transaction.
2. The check is cleared after printing finalized data on slip or guest check receipt, or the
check is also cleared when the same finalized check number is assigned in new check
operation.
This option is set on the page 46 of the programming manual.

2-5-2. Table transfer
This function is used for transferring the contents of a receipt to another check.
The detail data can be excluded from the transferring check by programming (ST transfer).
There are two cases depends on the status of the transferring check.
1. If the transfer check is not used.
The entered check number is written.
2. The check number is already used.
Add the contents to the existing contents.
This option is set on the page 98 of the programming manual.

2-5-3. Store and recall
These functions are used for the driving through purchase.
The check number used in store operation is defined by check No. range programming.
2-5-3-1 Store
This function is used for storing the check No. of the registered items. The Detail / Index
at the drive-through entrance record the registered items and store it’s check No., and then
print out the temporary receipt. A customer receives this temporary receipt, and drives up
to the exit with this to receive the ordered item. The stored data transfer to the check
tracking master/backup master.
2-5-3-1 Recall
This function is used for recalling the transferred check No. to total the sum. The terminal
at the drive-through exit recalls transferring check No. in order of the oldest record. A
customer can receive the ordered items, and pay for them.

R-46

Exit

Entrance

C
C

Order receipt
C
C

Order
PRN (2)

Receipt

KITCHEN

Temporary receipt

R/J

R/J
PRN (1)

Store

Recall

Hamburger
French Fries
Hot Coffee
Press the key → CHK No.100
Cheese Burger
Orange Juice
Press the key → CHK No.101

Press the key → CHK No.100
Hamburger
French Fries
Hot Coffee
Press the key → CHK No.101
Cheese Burger
Orange Juice

1. Without entering new check No., register items. After all ordered item have been
registered, press the key at the entrance to summarize the registered items.
The check No. is issued automatically. The contents of these check No. transfer to the
check tracking master / backup Master.
2. Press the key to recall the check at the exit.
Important
• A four-digit check No. should be used.
• When Open Check Z (All) report is printed out, the check No. range will be reset. After
this operation, the next check No. by using Store function will be the range start.
• This function works with the option “Clearing CHK/TBL No. by using the same number
again” to “Check number” only. (Refer to page 46 of the programming manual)

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-47

Application System
2-6. Clerk control function
2-6-1. Clerk interrupt
The terminal can be programmed to allow the clerk interrupt function, which makes it
possible for multiple clerk to simultaneously use the same register. If a clerk starts
registration of a transaction, another can be interrupt the original registration and begin a
new one. The original clerk can later resume the interrupted original registration. You can
use the clerk interrupt function with the check tracking function.
Clerk 1

Clerk 2

Clerk 3

Registration
Sign on clerk 2 (clerk 1 registration put on hold)
Registration
Sign on clerk 3 (clerk 2 registration put on hold)
Registration
Sign on clerk 1.
Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 1.
Registration
Finalization

Sign on clerk 2.
Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 2.

Registration
Finalization
Registration
Finalization

Sign on clerk 3.
Displays subtotal amount without add-on tax for clerk 3.
Sign on clerk 1

Guest
receipt issuance
Sign on clerk 2
Guest
receipt issuance
Sign on clerk 3
Guest
receipt issuance

Notes
1) Error correct operation
The error correct operation cannot be performed for registrations made before a clerk
change. The error correct operation should be performed before clerk change.
2) Guest receipt
A guest receipt can be issued following clerk change, and receipts can be issued
separately for each clerk.
3) Cancel operation
The cancel operation can affect the entire transaction (multiple receipts: complete
cancellation) or only the same transaction (one receipt) by programming the key.

R-48

2-6-2. Clerk detail memory
The terminal can summarize any daily / periodic total memory (such as fixed totalizer,
department, PLU, etc.) clerk by clerk.
After initialization, clerks have 10 detail memories which are assigned to gross, net, and
4 media in drawers. If you want to set more detail memories to clerks, allocate clerk detail
memory and detail link memory at the same time.
Clerk detail memory: File 011 / 111 / 211 / 311 / 411 / 511 / 611
Clerk detail link: File 030

2-6-3. Clerk training
Clerk training can be performed when employing new clerks or retraining clerks.
Training is normally performed during working hours, and the QT-6600 has the following
training functions.
1) It is not necessary to remove one terminal from the system for training purpose during
working hours.
2) Programming options, etc., are controlled exactly the same way as a working clerk.
3) Receipts are different from those normally used. The training receipts are filled with
training filler (“*” default.)

2-6-4. Manager mode control
There is no actual REG 2 mode on the terminal, but you can control some functions (you
want) under manager control.
Preparation for this function:
1) Set “NO” to any functions you want to disable for CLERKS in the Allowed function 1
~ 5 list in the clerk programming. (See page 76 ~ 78 of the programming manual.)
2) Set the type of operator to “Manager” for the manager. (See page 74 of the programming
manual.)
Operation for this function:
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0003

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•10.00
•20.00
•30.00

Operator mistake

3
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0003

•60.00

10-10-01 12:34

1. When the transaction is prohibited, the terminal displays
error message and the clerk calls the manager.

000001
•10.00
•20.00
•30.00

Operation Code ?

----•60.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. The manager press and enters “2”, press the key.

R-49

Application System
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0003

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•10.00
•20.00
•30.00

REG2 Mode

3
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0003
2

REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002

0.00
•60.00
000001
•10.00
•20.00

-30.00
•30.00

10-10-01 12:34

3. The manager enters his/her secret code and press the
key. After this operation, the prohibited transaction can be
registered.

4. Perform manager operation (in this example; void operation).

000001
•10.00
•20.00

REG Mode

0.00
•30.00

5. Pressing the and key is required, when the
manager returns his/ her office.

Note: Another manager’s intervention:
1. Manager signs on.
2. Open clerk window.
3. Designate appropriate clerk.
4. Perform manager operation.
5. Manager signs off.

R-50

2-7. Arrangement key function and scheduler
The arrangement key function provides a macro command function for the QT-6600
system. Any operation that can be performed using the keyboard of the QT-6600 can be
programmed to the arrangement file (file 038 ~ 438). Any operation programmed to the
arrangement file can be performed by pressing the arrangement key (function code 044).
Multi operations can be programmed into one arrangement program, and also entry of a
numeric parameter can be included anywhere in the arrangement program.
For example, when an arrangement program is programmed for executing fixed totalizer
Z consolidation for all terminal and the program is linked to an arrangement key, that
operation can be executed simply by pressing the arrangement key or attaching the iButton key to the receiver.
The scheduler function is provided for scheduled execution of arrangement key operation.
Execution of every specified time, as well as scheduled execution, can be performed using
this function.
The scheduler file (file 062) must be reserved to use the scheduler function.

2-7-1. Arrangement key function

The arrangement file and arrangement keys must be reserved for the QT-6600 to use the
arrangement key function.
The arrangement file is used to store the arrangement programs. An arrangement file
record is 24 bytes long, and a maximum of 9999 records can be reserved. Arrangement
programs are programmed using character data, and multiple arrangement programs can
be programmed in the arrangement file.
Multiple arrangement keys can be preset on the keyboard, and each key can be linked to
an arrangement program. The linked arrangement program is then called and executed by
pressing the arrangement key.
The following table shows the command parameters of the arrangement key function that
can be interpreted and executed by the QT-6600.
Command parameters can only be separated by spaces.
Note that spaces cannot be included within the command parameter.
Details of command parameters and their functions are explained next.
Number input
There are two methods to enter a number in an arrangement program.
– Constant number input
Preset a fixed number (constant value) enclosed in parentheses in the arrangement
program.
Example: To enter “1234” → preset (1234)
– Input of a single number when the arrangement program is executed.
A single number can be entered using the arrangement key. The number entered can be
used at any position and any time in the arrangement program.
Generally, an input number is temporarily stored in the work area (number entry buffer)
reserved for data processing, and is cleared after the processing is performed. With the
arrangement key function, a parameter save buffer is provided for saving the contents
of the number entry buffer. When a “%GET” command is encountered in an
arrangement program during processing, the data in the number entry buffer is saved
to the parameter save buffer. Set “%PUT” command to use the data saved in the
parameter buffer. The “%PUT” command can be used to load the data saved in the
parameter save buffer into the numeric entry buffer. These commands may be included
as often as necessary. The data in the parameter save buffer is changed only when a
“%GET” command is processed.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-51

Application System
Note:
• Set a “%GET” command, first, to use the number entered by the arrangement key later.
• When the “%GET” is programmed following constant number input, the constant
number is saved to the parameter save buffer.
• Numbers input using a “%PUT” command or by “([number])” are entered to the
number entry buffer in the same way as numbers input using the 10-key pad.
2)

Key function specification
Any function key can be specified for an arrangement key function. :
[function code]:[record number] → Used for ordinary function keys
The numbers can be specified for zero suppression.
Note:
The arrangement key itself, cannot be programmed for in an arrangement program.

Mode setting
Any mode key can be specified for an arrangement key function. :
[function code]:[mode definition]→ Used for mode keys
Note:
121:01
121:02
121:03
122:01
122:02
122:03
122:04
122:05
123:01
123:02
123:03
123:04
123:05
123:06

REG mode
REF mode
REG– mode
X/Z mode:
MGR mode:
Collection/Consolidation mode:
Auto-program mode:
CF card:
PGM1 mode:
PGM2 mode:
PGM3 mode:
PGM4 mode:
PGM5 mode:
PGM6 mode:

Print control
There are two commands for controlling the printer:
PON
POFF

R-52

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

: Output printout data.
: Not output printout data.

Controlling the flow of arrangement command execution
There are 32 commands for controlling the flow of arrangement command execution:
:Snnnn

: This is a start mark of an arrangement. “nnnn” (4-digits code) are used for
arrangement table number set to each arrangement key.

(nnnn)

: “nnnn (no digit limitation)” means numeric entry.

NN:nnnn : “NN” is a function code which is executed in this arrangement, “nnnn” is the
record No. of the function.
:[label]

: Preset the label (name of specific position) to specify the jump destination
point in the arrangement file. The actual data for labels can be freely
designated.
Example: To specify “LABEL-1” as label → :LABEL-1

G:[label]

: This is an absolute jump command. If the system encounters this command,
command execution flow unconditionally jumps and continues from the
point preset by the label.

I > ([number]):[label]

: This is a conditional jump command. If the system
encounters this commands, the value in the number
entry buffer is compared with the specific number. If the
value in the buffer is larger than the specified number,
the command execution flow jumps and continues from
the point preset by the label. If the condition is not match
with the above-mentioned condition, the step advances
to the next command.

I < ([number]):[label]

: This is a conditional jump command. If the value in the
number entry buffer is less than the specified number,
the command execution flow jumps to the point preset
by the label. If the condition is not match with the abovementioned condition, the step advances to the next
command.

I – ([number]):[label]

: This is a conditional jump command. If the system
encounters this command, the value in the numeric
entry buffer is compared with the specific number. If the
value in the buffer is equal to the specific number, the
command execution flow jumps and continues from the
point preset by the label. If the condition is not match
with the above-mentioned condition, the step advances
the next command.

KNO1

: This is a command to enter the <#-1> key.

KNO2

: This is a command to enter the <#-2> key.

: This is a command to wait for numeric entry. After entering numerics,
press the key to continue the arrangement
program.

B:nn

: This is a command to sound buzzer for nn (nn = 01 ~ 99) seconds.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-53

Application System
?

: Force to execute the arrangement even if an error occurred during the
arrangement.

ANO
AYES

: Disable clerk auto sign-off.
: Enable clerk auto sign-off.

CFFMT
: Format CF card.
CFSVnnn’mmmm’ : Backup to CF card (nnn: command code, mmmm: file name).
CFLDnnn’mmmm’ : Restore from CF card (nnn: command code, mmmm: file name).
JCL
JCLA

: Clear electronic journal older half data
: Clear all electronic journal data

CLPn:m

CLSn

: Set the default @ menu shift number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 2) and Status/ stay
down @ menu shift assignment to “m” (m = 0 ~ 2) of all clerk.
: Set the default menu shift number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 15) and Status/ stay
down menu shift assignment to “m” (m = 0 ~ 2) of all clerk.
: Set the default shift PLU level number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 8).

211:nnnn
212:nnnn
213:nnnn

: Press the “ESC” key. (nnnn: record No.)
: Press the “YES” key. (nnnn: record No.)
: Press the “NO” key. (nnnn: record No.)

%GET
%PUT

: Read from key buffer. (incl. decimal point)
: Write to key buffer. (incl. decimal point)

CLL0n

: Set the default clerk pop-up window number to “n” (n = 0 ~ 9).

PLY:nn
!:sss
F:m:nn

: Play the 7nn (nn: 01 ~ 10) sound file.
: Wait the next step for “sss” (ss = 001 ~ 327) sec.
: Sending data (designated by “nn”) to the terminal (designated by “m”)
via FTP.
“m” means the rec-# of file-912, “nn” means the rec-# of file-913

CLMn:m

R-54

End of the arrangement programs
The end command “E” must be included at the end (exit) point of an arrangement program.

2-7-2. Arrangement program example
This section shows examples of arrangement programs.
The following example shows an arrangement program that executes X consolidation of
the file set in the batch 1 ~ 9 files for all terminals.
Example:
Programming the following operation for the arrangement table 12
– Set the mode to Inline X/Z.
– Enter operation code “1111100000000”.
– Wait for the numeric entries (batch number).
– Enter the <#-2> key.
– Enter the key.
:S0012
; Designate the table number (mandatory)
122:03
; Set the mode to Inline X/Z.
NE
; Wait for the batch number
I<(0):ERR1
; If the input number is less than 0, the process jumps to the ERR1.
I>(9):ERR1
; If the input number is larger than 9, the process jumps to the ERR1.
%GET
; Save the entered number to the parameter save area.
202:0031
; Press “Clear” button.
(1111100000000) ; Input the operation code for system command
%PUT
; Pick up the entered number from the parameter save area.
KNO2
; Specify the <#-2> key for entering the operation code.
211:0045
; Specify the key to execute this operation.
:ERR1
; When the input number is not 1 to 9, the following commands are
processed.
E
; End the program (mandatory).

2-7-3. Scheduled execution of arrangement function
An arrangement key function can be executed on a scheduled basis. In order to execute an
arrangement key function on a scheduled basis, it is necessary to make appropriate settings
in the scheduler file (file 062).
There are two functions for execution on a scheduled basis:
1) Execute an arrangement key function at the specified time.
2) Interval execution of an arrangement key function by setting start time, ending time,
and the interval.
See the page 48 of the programming manual for programming details.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-55

Application System
2-8. Making graphic logo
A graphic logo can be printed on UP-400 / UP-360 receipt. This graphic logo is stored in
the graphic logo file ( file 047 for UP-400 / UP-360), and printed at the top of the receipt
instead of a normal logo message.
This graphic logo data cannot be made by the terminal program, it can be made only by PC
and downloaded from PC.

2-8-1. About graphic logo
Graphic logo size:
Printing sample:

432 × 104 or 432 × 208 pixels

**************************************
* QT-6600 TERMINAL
*
*
GRAPHIC LOGO AREA *
**************************************
*******COMMERCIAL
*******COMMERCIAL
*******COMMERCIAL
*******COMMERCIAL

MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE

1*******
2*******
3*******
4*******

2-8-2. Making graphic logo procedure
Before following this procedure please allocate “Graphic logo” file (file 047) on the terminal.
1. Making a bit-map image file:
(432 × 104 or 432 × 208 pixels; 1-bit color for UP-400 / UP-360).
2. Convert this bit-map file to the internal file by executing the PC tool.
PC sends the converted data to the terminal via online automatically.
3. Select “Print Graphic” option in the message control of the general feature in the PGM
3 mode.
4. Send the graphic logo to the printer by executing “Printer Logo Send” in the MGR mode.

R-56

2-9. Hourly item
This function enables to memorize the detailed data of quantity and amount / price of each
item dealt hourly.
It is possible to calculate the proceeds and record the hourly item in any totalizer, and also
it is possible to print out as an hourly item report.

2-9-1. Programming necessary files before using hourly item function.
Hourly item function requires the following files to function properly, so they must be
programmed before using it. See the programming manual for the details on format of
individual files.
– Time zone file
This file is used to specify the time zone for the detail items individually. You can enter
the starting time and the ending time of the time zone, moreover specify the cycle time that
indicates an unit of the appropriate intervals.
– Hourly item link file
This file is used to record the Hourly item which links with the appropriate time zone. You
can also specify the particular totalizer for each time zone.
– Hourly item
This file is used to store the contents of the quantity and amount of each registered item.
The following seven files enable to link the data for hourly item link file: fixed totalizer,
function, subdepartment, PLU, department, group, void reason.

Hourly item report example
08:00->09:00
Hamburger
2
$2.00
French Fries
3
$1.50
---------------------------------------$3.50
09:00->10:00
Cheese Burger
2
$3.00
Hot Coffee
2
$0.50
---------------------------------------$3.50
:
13:00->13:15
Apple Pie
1
$1.00
Hot Milk
1
$1.00
----------------------------------------

Time zone file
Start
Time

End
Time

Cycle

Zone 08:00

12:00

01:00

13:00
•
•
•

14:00
•
•
•

00:15
•
•
•

Hourly item link

20 items

REC No.
0001
0011
•
•
•
•
•
0005
0008
•
•
•
•

File No.
004
001
•
•
•
•
•
012
012
•
•
•
•

A maximum of 20 records
corresponds to each time
zone.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-57

Application System
2-10.

Time and attendance
This function allows shop owners to control his / her employees’ working condition. Time
& attendance require the following files.
– Employee file
This file is used to regulate the labor conditions.
You can program the type of job, the maximum work hours in a week or shift schedule
of a day per employee.
– Job code file
This file is used to classify the types of job. You can program the general work pay and
the overtime pay ratio per job file.
If some employees have a common job, you can divide the job code individually in case
their pay ratio is different.
– Schedule file
This file is used to administrate the employees’ schedule. You can assign a starting and
an ending time, a grace period, break minutes allowed, and the default job code for the
shift. It is possible to record maximum 21 shifts (3 shifts × 7 days) per employee for the
schedule file.
Grace period – this is a period of time in minutes which allows an employee to clock-in /
out before / after their scheduled times. Grace period works in conjunction with the
schedule. If the scheduler is not being utilized then the grace period inputs indicated
below become inactive.
Grace period before start time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may
clock-in before the scheduled clock-in time.
Grace period after start time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may
clock-in after the scheduled clock-in time.
Grace period before end time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may
clock-out before the scheduled clock-out time.
Grace period after end time – this input indicates how many minutes an employee may
clock-out after the scheduled clock-out time.
(See “4-1-15. Programming time & attendance” for the programming manual.)

Monday

Tuesday
•
•
•
•

Sunday

Job
Code

Start
Time

End
Time

Break
Time

Grace Before
Start

Grace After
Start

Shift

9:00

12:00

00:15

Shift

13:00

15:00

00:15

Shift

16:00

18:00

00:15

Shift

9:00

12:00

00:15

Shift

13:00

15:00

00:15

Shift

16:00

18:00

00:15

•
•
•
•

Grace Before Grace After
End
End

Each employee can have 3 shifts per day. The schedule file can hold 7 days schedule.
So, totally 21 files can be registered in this file.

R-58

– Work time file
This file is used to administrate each employees’ weekly hourly wages, work hours.
– Time zone file
This file is used to administrate the cycle time. You can specify the length of time zone.

2-10-1. Corresponding relations of the file
Employees’ job assign
This function is used to assign a job to each employee. Before assigning the job, be sure
to program the details of the jobs. Every employee file can link to some job code files
(maximum 4 jobs), so some employees may link to the same job code file. But be sure to
make individual job files if the employees work under different hourly wages.
Job code
Employee 1

Job 1

Employee 2

Job 2

Employee 3

Job 3

Employee 4

Job 4
Job 5
Job 6

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-59

Application System
Employee’s Schedule and total business results per week
Schedule
Employee 1

Employee 1

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 2

Employee 1

Monday

Shift 2

Employee 3

Employee 1

Monday

Shift 3

Employee 4

Employee 1

R-60

Employee 1

First week

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 1

First week

Monday

Shift 2

Employee 1

First week

Monday

Shift 3

Employee 1

First week

Tuesday

Shift 1

Employee 1

First week

Sunday

Shift 3

Employee 1

Second week

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 1

Second week

Monday

Shift 2

Employee 1

Second week

Monday

Shift 3

Employee 1

Second week

Sunday

Shift 3

Employee 2

First week

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 2

First week

Monday

Shift 2

Employee 2

First week

Monday

Shift 3

Employee 2

First week

Tuesday

Shift 1

Employee 2

First week

Sunday

Shift 3

Employee 2

Second week

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 2

Second week

Monday

Shift 2

Employee 2

Second week

Monday

Shift 3

•
•
•

Tuesday Shift 1
Sunday

Shift 3

Employee 2

Monday

Shift 1

Employee 2

Monday

Shift 2

Monday

Shift 3

Employee 1

Work time

•
•
•

Employee 2

•
•
•

Calculating the total wages of the employees per hour
Time zone

Hourly/Labor

Zone 1 Cycle 1

Totalizer 1

Zone 1 Cycle 2

Totalizer 2

Zone 1 Cycle 3

Totalizer 3

Zone 2 Cycle 1

Totalizer 4

Zone 2 Cycle 2

Totalizer 5

Calculating the total wages of the employees per week
Weekly wages per employee
= Total of daily wages *1 (Worktime < Programmed weekly worktime value)
or
= Total of weekly wages *2 (Worktime Programmed weekly worktime value)
*1 Daily wages
= Regular time cost + Overtime cost
= (Pay rate / job) * (Daily regular time) + (Pay rate / job) * (Daily overtime ratio) * (Daily
over time 1) + (Pay rate / job)* (Daily 2nd overtime ratio) * (Daily overtime 2)
cf. Daily overtime 1: Programmed daily work time ~ Programmed daily overtime
Daily overtime 2: Programmed daily overtime ~
*2 Weekly wages
= Total of daily wages + Overtime cost 1 + Overtime cost 2
= Total of daily wages + (Pay rate / job) * (Weekly overtime pay ratio) * (Weekly overtime 1)
+ (Pay rate / job) * (Pay rate / job) * (Weekly 2nd overtime ratio) * (Weekly overtime 2)
cf. Weeky overtime 1: Programmed weekly work time ~ Programmed weekly overtime
Weekly overtime 2: Programmed weekly overtime ~
Flow of Time & Attendance operation
The following flow shows the order of Time & Attendance function by pressing the
specified keys: It is possible to specify one key as both and function, or specify two keys separately. ( Refer to “4-3-7-33 Worksheet for clockin/clock-out” in the programming manual for details.)

CLOCK-IN

→

QT-6600 Reference Manual

(

BREAK-IN

→

BREAK-OUT

)

→

CLOCK-OUT

R-61

Application System
2-10-2. Clock-in operation
This function is used to register the Starting work time. If the total worktime is greater than the daily/ weekly
programmed time, minor employee cannot be clocked in. (Error 169 occurs) In this case, clock-in by manager.

2-10-2-1. Clock-in operation (1)
Program: Not using the window and impossible to specify job code.
Allow to specify job code = NO, Display job code window = NO
(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL

11:59

Clock-in OK?

0.00
1. XXXXXX
When this message appears, press the key to register
the start of working hours.
XXXXXX
Employee No.

R-62

2-10-2-2. Clock-in operation (2)
Program: Allow to specify job code = YES, Display job code window = NO
(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL

11:59

Clock-in OK?

0.00

1. XXXXXX . YY
When this message appears, press the key to register
the start of working hours.
Enter the employee No. (within 6 digits), “.”(decimal point),
and the job code (2 digits).
XXXXXX . YY
Employee No. Job code

2-10-2-3. Clock-in operation (3)
Program: Display job code window = YES
Allow to clock-in with non-preset job-code = NO
(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

CLOCK-IN
1.Cashier
2.Cook
3.Dish Washer
4.Cleaning

0.00

1. XXXXXX
2. Choose the appropriate Job Code from the CLOCK-IN menu,
and press the key to register the start of working
hours.
→ Job codes that are programmed in Employee file are displayed.
XXXXXX
Employee No.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-63

Application System
2-10-2-4. Clock-in operation (4)
Program:

Display job code window = YES
Allow to clock-in with non-preset job code = YES
(Refer to the page 62 of the programming manual.)

Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234
CLOCK-IN
1.Cashier
2.Cook
3.Dish Washer
4.Cleaning
5.JOB A
6.JOB B
7.JOB C
8.JOB D

0.00

1. XXXXXX
2. Choose the appropriate Job Code from the CLOCK-IN menu,
and press the key to register the start of working
hours.
→ All job codes that are programmed in job code file are displayed.

XXXXXX
Employee No.

Receipt sample
MC #01
— Header
12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

REG C01
Harrison
CLOCK-IN
JOB

— Employee character (16 digits)
11:59 AM — Special character (REC #29), time
Dish Washier
— Special character (REC #33), job character

If you want to change these special characters, refer to the page 134 of the programming
manual.

R-64

2-10-3. Clock-out operation
This function is used to register the ending work time.

2-10-3-1. Clock-out operation (1)
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL

11:59

Clock-out OK?

1. XXXXXX .
2. When this message appears, press the key to register
the end of working hours.

0.00

2-10-3-2. Clock-out operation (2)
Program: Tip declaration compulsory (refer to the page 61 of the programming manual.)
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

Enter cash tip amount and
press key.

1. XXXXXX .
2. When this message appears, the employee should enter the
cash tip amount, if not, it is impossible to close the accounts

0.00
Receipt sample
REG C01

MC #01
— Header
12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Harrison
CLOCK-IN
JOB
CLOCK-OUT

— Employee character (16 digits)
11:59 AM — Special character (REC #29), time
Dish Washier
— Special character (REC #33), job character
01:59 PM — Special character (REC #30), time

WORK TIME
BREAK TIME
CASH TIP

02:45
00:45
$12.34

— Special character (REC #34), working hours
— Special character (REC #35), recess
— Special character (REC #36), cash tip amount

If you want to change these special characters, refer to the page 134 of the programming
manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-65

Application System
2-10-3-3. Break-in operation
This function is used for the employees to register a recess.
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL

11:59

Break-in OK?

0.00

1. XXXXXX .
2. When this message appears, press the key to register
the start of a recess.
The receipt is not printed out, except electronic journal.

2-10-3-4. Break-out operation
This function is used for the employees to register the end of a recess.
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

GLENN DEAL

11:59

Break-out OK?

0.00

1. XXXXXX .
2. When this message appears, press the key to register
the end of a recess.
The receipt is not printed out, except electronic journal.

2-10-3-5. Manager operation
When the manager operate CLOCK-IN after signing on, the manager can operate and
modify any employee’s record despite of corresponding employee number.
Following operations are possible to operate by the manager:
Specify the job code / CLOCK-IN / CLOCK-OUT / BREAK-IN / BREAK-OUT
Operating Flow
Manager sign on

R-66

→

CLOCK-IN/OUT operation, BREAK-IN/OUT operation

→

Sign off

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-67

Application System
2-11.

Sign on control
This function is used to prohibit the sign-on operation by an employee who has not
CLOCK-IN. The following conditions should be fixed.
• Use only one terminal (master terminal) for the CLOCK-IN/OUT operation. This
terminal should be connected inline to the satellite terminals. But the time and
attendance work file (file 806) should be allocated to all terminals.
• The clerk file’s information should be common among all the terminals.
• Be sure there is a clerk who is specified as “Manager” in the clerk file. If no manager,
it may be locked to operate.

2-11-1. Sign on
1. When an employee normally operate CLOCK-IN/OUT, BREAK-IN/OUT, the
employee’s attendance information is sent from the main terminal to the satellite
terminals.
CLK#1 information
CLK#2 information
CLK#3 information

CLK# information

•
•
CLK#99 information

Flow of sign on
Sign on by
Manager

Sign on OK
He/she is NOT in the
middle of BREAK-IN

Sign on OK

CLOCK-IN
He/she is in the
middle of BREAK-IN

Sign on by
Clerk

CLOCK-IN unfinished

R-68

Unable to Sign on
(E175 Error message appears)

2-11-2. Solution to abnormality of master terminal
When the satellite terminals cannot receive any information from the master terminal, the
master terminal shows the error message on the window and prints out the receipt with
terminal IDs that failed to communicate the data.
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234
Harrison
CLOCK-IN
JOB

11:59 AM
Dish Washier

E177 Time&Attendance Data
Communication Error.
Please Call Manager.

0.00
Please sign on.

Receipt image
REG C01

MC #01
— Header
12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

Communication Error

— Fixed message

MC #01
MC #03

XXXX — Machine ID, Error code
XXXX — Machine ID, Error code

• The error message and receipt will appear whenever the sign-on is failed. If you cannot
solve the inline data communication problem, program the system connection again,
and remove the uncommunicative terminal.

2-11-3. Solution to abnormality of satellite terminal
• When the satellite terminal cannot receive any information from the master terminal,
the default CLOCK-IN/OUT information remain.
In this case, only manager can sign on.
• When the satellite terminal could receive the CLOCK-IN/OUT information from the
master terminal only once, but failed to receive after then, the CLOCK-IN/OUT
information in each satellite terminal has left in the last received condition. In such case,
the last received information control employees’ sign on/off. (Manager can always sign
on.)

2-11-4. Sign on compulsory
When the satellite terminal cannot receive the information in spite of normal CLOCK-IN
operation on the master terminal, an employee may not sign on for some reason.
In such case, the manager needs the following operation.
1. Sign on by the manager (normal sign on operation.)
2. 99 xxxx (xxxx: the secret code of the corresponding employee, 4-digit.)
3. Sign off by the manager and the corresponding employee can sign on.
Note:
When the error message appeared under the employee’s CLOCK-IN operation, manager
should operate above steps.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-69

Application System
2-12.

IDC (Item Data Capture)
This function is used for capturing all the registered item data by the REG / REF / REG–
modes. IDC file stores these captured items. If there is no record to capture item data, the
new data are not captured to the IDC file.

2-12-1. Available capturing items
Select the appropriate items that should be captured, and program these items into the IDC
link file. The available items and their contents are indicated below.
Items

File No.

PLU

004

Subdepartment

003

Department
Function

• The header of the transaction.
• The report of the items/functions, or all the
detailed statements.

005
002

Pulldown group

026

Mix & match

051

Clerk

R-70

Contents

• The header of the transaction.
• The report of all the detailed statements.

007

IDC function file

●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●

●

Function
NOP
Cash amount tendered
Charge
Check
Credit
Food stamp tender
New balance
EBT tender
Price inquiry
Stock inquiry
Text recall
Text print
Check print
Clerk transfer
Table transfer
Tip
Normal receipt
Loan
Received on account
Paid out
Pick up
Coupon
Deposit
Minus
Discount
Plus
Premium
Refund
Error correct/Void
Coupon 2
Validation
Receipt
Check endorsement
Non-add
Non-add/No sale
No sale
No. of customer
Arrangement
Currency exchange
VAT
Bill
PLU
Price
Department
Slip back feed/Release
Slip

*11

*10
*10

*1
*3
*1

*10
*10

*5
*1

Code
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
019
020
021
022
023
025
027
028
029
030
033
034
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
051
054
055

–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
O
–
–

●
●

Function
Code
Slip feed/Release
056 –
Tax status shift
*1 057 O
Table number
058 –
Food stamp shift *1 059 O
Declaration
061 –
Tax exempt
062 O
Flat PLU
063 O
Menu shift
064 –
Shift PLU
*1 065 O
Open
067 –
Open 2
068 –
First unit price
*1 069 O
Second unit price *1 070 O
Clerk number
*4 072 O
Operator read/reset
073 –
Tray total
*12 074 O
Subtotal
*7 075 O
Receipt On/Off
076 –
Taxable amount subtotal
077 –
Operator number
078 –
Merchandise subtotal *7 080 O
Food stamp subtotal
081 –
Multiplication
*1 082 O
Quantity/For
*1 083 O
Square
*1 084 O
Selective item subtotal *2 085 O
Tare
087 –
Scale
088 –
Cube
*1 090 O
New check
091 –
Old check
092 –
New/Old check
093 –
Add check
*8 094 –
Separate check
*8 095 –
Two zero (00)
096 –
Three zero (000)
097 –
Decimal point
098 –
Room number
100 O
Room message
101 –
OBR
103 –
Price change
104 –
Clock-in/out
108 –
Break-in/out
109 –
Coupon number
110 –
Substitution
111 –
Ketten Bon
*1 113 O

●

●
●
●
●

●

Function
House Bon
Post entry
Round repeat
Open check
Media change
Seat number
Display On/Off
Mode
Eat-in
Takeout
Store
Recall
Subdepartment
Subdepartment number
Department number
List
List number
NLU
Split payment
NFP
Customer No.
Payment
Swipe
Numerics (0 ~ 9)
Clear
Reverse display
Electronic journal display
Escape
Yes
No
Left arrow (←)
Right arrow (→)
Up arrow (↑)
Down arrow (↓)
Home
Display mode
Page down
Page up
Cancel
Work time
Item search
Order character change
Function list
Location change
Table sharing

*6
*6
*6
*6

*4
*4

Code
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
124
128
129
130
131
133
134
135
136
137
138
140
142
148
149
172
201
202
206
207
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
236
237
248
252
253
260
261

O
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
O
O
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
–
–
–
–
–
–

● : Available items to be programmed as target for IDC.
O : IDC target
– : Out of target

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-71

Application System
*1 This function itself is not captured. But it is captured with the captured items or
functions.
*2 Selective item subtotal is captured with selective item discount or premium.
*3 1. Error correct is not captured.
2. This function itself is not captured. But it is captured with voided items.
3. Void reason is also captured.
*4 These functions (items) are captured in header record.
*5 This function itself is not captured. But the functions that are executed by this
function are captured.
*6 This function is not captured. But item itself might be an IDC target.
*7 When the option (printed when the key is pressed) is selected, it is captured.
*8 Transferred items by the add check and the separate check are not captured.
*9 ST transfer is not captured.
*10 This function is captured only in the sales registration.
*11 This function is captured only in the check tracking registration.
During clerk interrupt operation, this is not captured.
*12 Tray total is captured when it is pressed twice.

R-72

2-12-2. Set up the IDC start / end
Specify IDC Start or IDC End in manager mode. IDC does not start if you not allocate
necessary files for IDC.
• When IDC function is stopped, you can restart IDC by performing FC or INIT 2
(Refer to the page 11 of the programming manual.)
Operation
Item Data Capture
Item Data Capture

YES

0.00

Note:
1. If you stop the IDC when the IDC file is full of items, you can stop the error sound
without clearing any registered data.
2. The necessary files for IDC
• File 036 (Registration buffer)
• File 063 (IDC buffer)
• File 057~ 059 (IDC file)
• File 804 (IDC link file)

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-73

Application System
2-12-3. How to memorize the captured items
Flow of the transferring data
1. Program: “Store data = Whole transaction for IDC (1)” and “Item only for IDC (2)”
(refer to the page 64 of the programming manual.)
Example
PLU 0001———> Memorized all the transaction into the IDC file (1)
PLU 0002———> Memorized into IDC file (2)
PLU 0003———> Memorized into IDC file (2)
IDC Buffer
PLU 0001
PLU 0002
PLU 0003
Total

IDC file (1)
Header
PLU 0001
Header
PLU 0002
Header
PLU 0003
Header
Total
IDC file (2)
Header
PLU 0002
Header
PLU 0003

2. Program: “Store data = Item only” (refer to the page 74 of the programming manual.)
When an appropriate item is selected, this item and the header will be captured (see the
illustration below).
Example
PLU 0001———> Memorized into IDC file (1)
PLU 0002———> Memorized into IDC file (2)
PLU 0003———> Memorized into IDC file (2)
IDC Buffer
PLU 0001
PLU 0002

IDC file (1)
Header
PLU 0001

PLU 0003
Total

IDC file (2)
Header
PLU 0002
Header
PLU 0003

R-74

2-12-4. IDC data file structure
Top record (Top record of each IDC file)
6

Mode
Clerk-#
D4:
D6:
D3: 01 = REG, 02 = REF, 03 = REG—
D5: Clerk #; newly created this check
D2:
D4:
D1: 00 = Normal, 01 = Training
D3: Clerk #; last opened this check
D2:
D1: Clerk #; opening this check

47 48 51 60
Not Used

Payment
Invoice-#

Customer-#

Subtotal
with tax

Subtotal
without tax

19 21

Net total

Number of
purchsed item

Mode

Check-#

Mc ID
01

11 13
Consecutive
No.

Clerk-#

Header
01 2

Used record number

Time

Allocated record number

Date

Payment
D2:
D1: 00: Non-payment, 01: Payment

Trailier (End record)
7

No. of
records

Not Used

Mc ID
09
Type *2
not used

01 2 3

No. of records
used records for current registration without end record.

Item
Item (PLU / Subdepartment / Department)
37 38 39

60
Descriptor

not used
Dept link
Group link
Random
code
Shift price level
not used

30 32 33 34
Unit price

25
Amount

Quantity

Rec-# *1

Void reason

11 13 15
Item status *4

Tax status *3

5
File-# *1

Mc ID
03

Type *2

01 2 3

Function
Cash, Charge, Check, Credit
Not Used

57 60

Descriptor

Room guest-#

40 41

Room-#

Totaling Type

31 32

Change
Amount

Total Amount

Tendering
amount in
local
currency

Tendering
amount in
foreign
currency

CE key
Rec-#

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 2 3

Totaling Type
0: Total operation, 1: Change operation, 2: Partial tender operation, 3: Single item w/o total line

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-75

R-76

Table transfer

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

20
26
31

Not Used

Descriptor

Totaling Type

Cash change
Amount

Food stamp
change amount
(only for FS/TD)

Food stamp
subtotal
amount

Tendering
amount

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

29 30

Text print, Text recall

Not Used

12
Not Used

Descriptor

Not Used

New balance fee

Not Used

Change
amount

Cashing
a check fee

Not used

Deccriptor

Character

Descriptor

9
Gross
amount

Gross
quantity

Amount
tendered

Not Used

5
New balance
fee

New
check-#

0 1 2 3

Original
check-#

01 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

012 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

01 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Application System
Food stamp tender, EBT tender
46
60

Totaling Type
0: Total operation, 1: Change operation, 2: Partial tender operation, 3: Single item w/o total line

New balance
35
60

30
60

Cashing a check

41
57

42
60

QT-6600 Reference Manual

33 34
Not Used

Descriptor

Rate decimal position
not used

23
33 34 35

Not Used

18
Not Used

Decsriptor

Descriptor

Rate

18
Unit Price

Not Used

Not used

Descriptor

Rate decimal position

11 13
Amount

Not used

Descriptor

Amount
14

Discount
amount

Not used

Descriptor

Amount
14

Rate

9
11 13

Amount

9
No.

Selective item
ST amount

5
Amount

Not Used

5
Item status *4

Item status *4

Tax status *3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Not Used

0 1 2 3

Tax status *3

0 12 3
Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Selective item
status-#

0 1 2 3
Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

012 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

012 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

01 2 3

Rec-# *1

FIile-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Tip
30
60

Loan / Pickup
30
60

Received on account / Paid out / Deposit
30
60

+ / - / Coupon

44
60

%+ / %-

51
60

%+ / %- after selective item subtotal

Selective item status-#
01: Selective item 1
02: Selective item 2

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

R-77

R-78

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

Not Used

ST / MDST
Taxable
amount 3
TA3
TA3
TA3
TA1 & 2
Taxable
amount 4
TA4
-TA4
TA 3

19
24

Taxable
amount 5
TA5
-TA1 & 2
TA1 & 3

Not Used

41
VAT exempt
amount

36
TAxable
amount 7

Taxable
amount 6

Taxable
amount 5

Taxable
amount 4

Taxable
amount 3

Not Used

Descriptor

Not Used

Taxable
amount 2

Taxble
amount 1

Not used

Descriptor

Digit

Number
14 17

Not Used

Taxable
amount 2
TA2
TA2
TA2
TA2

CE key
rec-#

9
21

Descriptor

9
16

Descriptor

Taxable
amount 1
TA1
TA1
TA1
TA1

Check-#

5
11

Subtotal
amount
after CE

Descriptor

Field name
Tax system
VAT
U.S.
Canada
Singapore

Printed
subtotal
amount

Subtotal
amount

Not Used

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

VAT exempt
amount

0 1 23

Tax status *3

Subtotal
amount

0 123

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Amount

0 1 23
Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 23

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 12 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Application System
# print (# or #/NS)
32
60

Tax exempt
51
60

Taxable
Taxable
amount 6 amount 7
TA6
TA7
--TA1 & 3
TA1 & 4
TA2 & 3 TA1 & 2 & 3

Media change / Tray total

Store

Eat-in / Takeout

MM type: Minus = 00, %- = 01, Free = 20

QT-6600 Reference Manual
21

not used

25
30

23 25 29

Not Used

Descriptor

Rate decimal position

Discount
amount

Rate

31 32

Not used

Descriptor

Shift price level

Descriptor

23
Unit price

not used

Descriptor

18
Amount

15 17 19

Target
rec-#

Target
file-#

Quantity

Amount

Not Used

not used

MM
rec-#
Tax status *3

9 10 11

Amount

11 13
Item status *4

Tax status *3

No.

9
16

No.

Amount

5
OBR code

not used

Tax status *3

Selective item
status-#

Record-#

Not Used

Type *2

Mc ID
03
5
Not Used

Descriptor

Amount

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

Not used

0 1 2 3

Descriptor

01 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

MM type
MM discount

01 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

01 2 3

not used

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 2 3

Rec-# *1

File-# *1

Type *2

Mc ID
03

0 1 23

Cancel
30
50

Loyalty discount
48
60

Selective item status-#
00: S
T %01: Selective item 1 %02: Selective item 2 %-

Scanning

34 35
51

Mix and match

Scan mix and match

MM discount: Cyclic = 00, Only once = 01, Contunious = 02

No sale (NS or #/NS)

*1 ~ *4: Refer to the last page of this section.

R-79

Application System
*1 File-#, Rec-#:
These are stored in Hexa-decimal. If the data is “ABCD”, it means “CDAB”.
*2 Type:
It means record type, refer to 2-12-5 IDC data type section of this manual.
*3 Tax status:
• Single tax/VAT
b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: T/S4, b5: T/S5, b6: T/S6, b7: T/S7, b8: T/S8, b9: T/S9, b10: T/S10
• U.S. or Singapore
b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: F/S
• Canada
b1: T/S1, b2: T/S2, b3: T/S3, b4: T/S4, b9: Donuts tax, b10: always “1”
*4 Item status:
b6~: not used, b5: 2nd@registration, b4: house Bon registration,
b3: registration, b2: registration, b1: registration

R-80

2-12-5. IDC data type
Type of data
Type
DTLTYPE_SCAN
05
DTLTYPE_SDEPT
0A
DTLTYPE_DEPT
0F
DTLTYPE_PLU
14
DTLTYPE_SET_FIX
19
DTLTYPE_SET_SEL
1E
DTLTYPE_COND
23
DTLTYPE_PREP
28
DTLTYPE_ITEM_PLUS
3C
DTLTYPE_ITEM_MINUS
3D
DTLTYPE_ITEM_CPN
3E
DTLTYPE_ITEM_P_PLUS
3F
DTLTYPE_ITEM_P_MINUS
40
DTLTYPE_CASH
47
DTLTYPE_CHARGE
48
DTLTYPE_CHECK
49
DTLTYPE_CREDIT
4A
DTLTYPE_FSTD
4B
DTLTYPE_NBCHKTRC
50
DTLTYPE_CANCEL
55
DTLTYPE_TBLTR
56
DTLTYPE_NBFEE
57
DTLTYPE_STORE
58
DTLTYPE_ST_PLUS
64
DTLTYPE_ST_MINUS
65
DTLTYPE_ST_CPN
66
DTLTYPE_ST_P_PLUS
67
DTLTYPE_ST_P_MINUS
68
DTLTYPE_SIST_PERCENT_PLUS
69
DTLTYPE_SIST_PERCENT_MINUS
6A
DTLTYPE_ST
6F
DTLTYPE_MDST
70
DTLTYPE_PRT_CHAR
71
DTLTYPE_SHARP
73
DTLTYPE_TIP
74
DTLTYPE_DEPO
75
DTLTYPE_TXEX
76
DTLTYPE_EATIN
77
DTLTYPE_TAKEOUT
78
DTLTYPE_TRAYTTL
79
DTLTYPE_RC
96
DTLTYPE_PD
97
DTLTYPE_MEDIA_CHG
98
DTLTYPE_GET_MONEY
99
DTLTYPE_PUT_MONEY
9A
DTLTYPE_LOAN
9B
DTLTYPE_PICKUP
9C
DTLTYPE_FIN_LOANPICKUP
9D
DTLTYPE_AMOUNT_EXCHANGE
9E
DTLTYPE_CASH_IN_CHECK
9F
DTLTYPE_MIX&MATCH
A0
DTLTYPE_SCAN_MM
A3
DTLTYPE_NOSALE
B4
DTLTYPE_END
FF
* Includes the item registered as a child PLU

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Capture item
Scan item
Main item : Subdepartment
Main item : Department
Main item : PLU
Dependent item : Set-menu/child (fixed)
Dependent item : Set-menu/child (option)
Dependent item : Condiment *
Dependent item : Preparation
Dependent item (discount) : item +
Dependent item (discount) : item Dependent item (discount) : item CPN
Dependent item (discount) : item %+
Dependent item (discount) : item %Finalize : Cash
Finalize : Charge
Finalize : Check
Finalize : Credit
Finalize : FSTD / EBTTD
NB (check tracking) operation
Cancel
Table transfer
NB fee
Store
ST +
ST ST CPN
ST %+
ST %SIST %+
SIST %ST
MDST
PRINT CHAR
# Print
Tip
Deposit
Tax exempt
Eat-in
Takeout
Tray total
RC
PD
Medial change
Media change (get)
Media change (put)
Loan
Pick up
Finalize loan/pick up
Currency exchange
Cashing a check
Mix & match
Scan mix & match
No sales
End IDC Record

R-81

Application System
2-12-6. Transferring IDC
It is possible to do collection of IDC files through inline system. Refer to the terminal
structure as below.

PC
Via COM 1 port of the master terminal (direct/Modem)

C
C

Collection Master

C
C

Satellite

C
C

Satellite

Flow of the transferring IDC
1. PC sends Z-lock command by using job command to collection master.
PC enables to check the Z-lock confirmation.
2. PC sends the consolidation command by using Job command to collect IDC files from
all satellite terminals.
3. Collection master receives the IDC data from each satellite in order.
PC enables to check whether the collection master has finished the job.
4. PC sends the Z-command or X-command to the collection master.
5. PC receives the collection data from consolidation file. If the Z-command has issued
at step 4, consolidation file in the collection master are all reset.

Data transferring flow
IDC data in each terminal totalizer is appended to the consolidation file individually.
Consolidation file (in Collection Master)
Master file

Copy

Data from Master Totalizer

Append

Satellite (1) file

Satellite (2) file

Append

Data from Satellite (1)
Data from Satelite (2)
•
•
•

Notes:
• Just after IDC starts, the consolidation file in the collectionmaster is cleared to receive
new data.
• Just after the receiving is over, the data is remained in the consolidation file. To clear
this data, send the Z-command or the file-clear command to the collection master from
the PC. (Set “No”, to “Reset consolidation total after inline consolidation” in the
programming the communication in the machine feature programming.
• In case of collection Z, all of the IDC files in the satellite terminals are cleared.

R-82

2-13.

Electronic journal
There are two types of electronic journal. One is “normal” electronic journal, the other is
“intelligent” electronic journal. The “normal” electronic journal stores all operations such
as registration, report issuing and programming, but the “intelligent” electronic journal
stores only registration. And the “intelligent” electronic journal stores one receipt when the
transaction is finalized (not stored at new balance). You can use the “normal” and the
“intelligent” electronic journal at the same time.
Electronic journal is stored in the terminal memory, so it is possible to print journal
(electronic journal report) by date or by consecutive number.
And since the journal data is stored in the memory, you can collect journal data from all
terminals in the system. Also, you can issue receipt and guest receipt from electronic
journal.

2-13-1. Storing electronic journal
The normal electronic journal starts automatically and it ends if the journal memory
becomes full. When the memory becomes full, the terminal alerts end error which you can
select to alert or not to alert by programming. Refer to the page 42 of the programming
manual.
The intelligent electronic journal starts automatically and it returns to the top of the
memory if the journal memory becomes full.
Notes:
Even if the electronic journal memory is full, registrations are not disturbed.

2-13-2. Issuing electronic journal report
You can issue both type of the electronic journal read or reset report by date or by
consecutive number.
Refer to the page 156 of this manual.

2-13-3. Displaying normal electronic journal and producing guest receipts after sales
Pressing the key shows the most recent transactions. You can go to older
transactions by pressing the key while newer transactions by the key. And also you can move lines in a transaction by the <↑> or <↓> key.
During displaying an transaction, you can issue the post receipt of this transaction by
pressing the key. If the guest receipt in the original transaction was issued
you can get the copy of the guest receipt by pressing the key.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-83

Application System
2-13-4. Transferring electronic journal memory
It is possible to do collection of electronic journal files through inline system.
Refer to the terminal structure illustrated below.

PC
Via COM 1 port of the master terminal (direct/Modem)

C
C

Collection Master

Satellite

C
C

Satellite

C
C

Satellite

Flow of the transferring electronic journal
1. PC sends the collection command by using Job command to collect electronic journal
file from a satellite terminal.
2. Collection master receives the electronic journal data from a satellite.
PC enables to check whether the collection master has finished the job.
3. PC sends the data send command to the collection master for the collected electronic
journal data.
4. PC receives the collection data from the master.
5. Repeat step 1 ~ 4 for all satellites.

Data transferring flow
Electronic journal data in each terminal is collected file individually.
Copy
Copy

Satellite (1) file

Satellite (2) file

Copy

Consolidation file
(in Collection
Master)

Satellite (1)
Satellite (2)

•
•
•

•
•
•
File 048 and 648 for “normal” electronic journal.
File 050 and 650 for “intelligent” electrionic journal.

R-84

2-14.

Simple time and attendance
This function allows shop owners to control his / her employees’ working time and clockout reason.
– Simple time & attendance file
This file is used to log the clock-in time, clock-out time and clock-out reason.
– Clock-out reasen file
In this file, clock-out reasons stored in this file. You can choose the clock-out reason
everytime when you clock-out. The clock-out reason is logged in the simple time &
attendance file.
Flow of Simple Time & Attendance operation
The following flow shows the order of simple time & attendance function by pressing the
specified keys: It is possible to specify one key as both clock-in and
clock-out function, or specify two keys separately. ( Refer to “4-3-7-33 Worksheet for
clock-in/clock-out” in the programming manual for details.)
CLOCK-IN

→

CLOCK-OUT

2-14-1. Clock-in operation
This function is used to register the Starting work time.
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

PERSONALNO.: ---*****

1. XXXXXX (C/D)
XXXXXX: Employee’s number
C/D: Check digit for employee number
(modulas 10, weight 13)

Receipt sample
REG

MC #01
12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234
Simple Time/Atten Records
EMPLOYEE No.
SIGN ON
12-31-2005

001234

11:59

QT-6600 Reference Manual

— Header
— Title
— Employee number
— Clock-in sign
— Clock-in time

R-85

Application System
2-14-2. Clock-out operation
This function is used to register the Ending work time.
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

1. XXXXXX (C/D)

PERSONALNO.: ---*****
REG

XXXXXX: Employee’s number
C/D: Check digit for employee number

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

Sign off Reasons
1.END OF SHIFT
2.UNWELL
3.FAMILY EMERGENCY
4.OTHER

0.00

2. Select clock-out reasen.

Receipt sample
MC #01
12-31-2005 11:59 AM 001234

REG

Simple Time/Atten Records
EMPLOYEE No.
SIGN OFF
12-31-2005

001234

— Header
— Title
— Employee number
— Clock-in sign
— Clock-in time

11:59

2-14-3. Worktime display
This function shows the employee’s worktime.
Operation
REG

10-10-01 11:59 AM 001234

SIMPLE TIME IN ACCOUNT
TODAY :
4:58
TOTAL :
16:07
STATUS : SIGNED OFF

1. XXXXXX (C/D)

0.00

XXXXXX: Employee’s number
C/D: Check digit for employee number

2-14-4. Report
Clock-in/ clock-out time and clock-out reason are printed on the simple time and attendance report.
Refer to the Read/ Reset chapter.

R-86

2-15.

Magnetic card reading
QT-6600 has the following capability by swiping magnetic card.
1. Customer number entry *1
You can enter customer number, by swiping magnetic card.
key

→

Card swipe

• Customer number should be programmed in the customer file.
• Site No. in the mag stripe equals to the programmed value.
• Use Track-1
2. Create dummy check *1
Card swiping activates table transfer.
• Read the customer name from the magnetic card and store it to the check index memory.
• In case of using this feature, program “transfer table by card swiping” (D10 of the
address 26 of the general control program)
• Use Track-1
3. Clerk sign on *1
Card swiping activates clerk sign on. (effective during signing off only)
• In case of using this feature, the lower 4 digit in the mag stripe should be set to the clerk
number.
• Use Track-2 (If track-2 cannot read, use track-1.)
4. Enter REG 2 mode *1
Cashier/ clerk can enter the REG 2 mode, by swiping card.
key

→

<2> key

→

Card swipe

• In case of using this feature, the lower 4 digit in the mag stripe is treated as manager’s
secret number.
• Use Track-2 (If track-2 cannot read, use track-1.)
5. Loyalty card
This function is used to register the key strings such as customer discount etc., by swiping
magnetic card (and scanning OBR code). After swiping a card (track-2)/ scanning a code, the
designated function in the transaction key file is executed.
Procedure
• Using swiping:
key

→

Card swipe *1 *2
key should be allocated in the transaction key file.
If there is no key on the keyboard, program D7 and D6
of the address 24 of the genreral control program to designate the
default key.

Card swipe *2

• Using scanning:
key

→

Code scanning *1*2

Pressing key is mandatory.

After swiping/ scanning card, the following subjects are performed.
1. Check card expiry (In case of programming check to key.)
2. Card data check (Checked by D10 ~ D8 of key program and unit price field of
key.
3. Transfer card data (D7 and D6 of key program)
4. Activate function (D5 ~ D1 of key program)
*1 In case of setting “Swipe has NOT precedence.” (D1 of the address 24 of the general control program)
*2 In case of setting “Swipe has precedence.” (D1 of the address 24 of the general control program)

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-87

Application System
Magenetic card specification
Track-1, Format B:
Start sentinel - one character (generally ‘%’)
Format code = “B” - one character (alpha only)
Primary account number (PAN) - up to 19 characters
Usually, but not always, matches the credit card number
printed on the front of the card.
Field separator - one character (generally ‘^’)
Name - two to 26 characters
Field separator - one character (generally ‘^’)
Expiration date - four characters in the form MMYY
Service code - three characters
Discretinary data - may include Pin Verification Key Indicator (PVKI, one character),
Pin Verification Value (PVV, 4 characters)
Card Verification Value or Card Verification Code (CVV or CVK, 3
characters)
End sentinel - one character (generally ‘?’)
Longitudinal redundancy check (LRC) - one character
Track-2:
Start sentinel - one character (generally ‘:’)
Track number - 1, 2, 3
Primary Account Number (PAN) - up to 19 characters
Usually, but not always, matches the credit card number
printed on the front of the card
Separator - one character (generally ‘=’)
Expiration date - four characters in the form MMYY
Service code - three characters
Discretionary data - as in track one
End sentinel - one character (generally ‘?’)
LRC - one character

R-88

3. Manager operation ................................................................................. R-88
3-1. Machine initialization ............................................................................. R-88
3-1-1.
3-1-2.
3-1-3.
3-1-4.

INIT ............................................................................................................... R-88
Flag clear ...................................................................................................... R-88
INIT 2 ............................................................................................................ R-89
INIT code ...................................................................................................... R-89

3-2. IPL (Initial Program Loading) ................................................................ R-89
3-2-1.
IPL................................................................................................................. R-89
IPL via CF card .......................................................................................................... R-89
3-2-2.
System configuration before IPL operation ................................................... R-90
IPL via LAN port......................................................................................................... R-90

3-3. Manager function ................................................................................... R-91
3-3-1.
3-3-2.
3-3-3.
3-3-4.
3-3-5.
3-3-6.
3-3-7.
3-3-8.
3-3-9.
3-3-10.
3-3-11.
3-3-12.
3-3-13.
3-3-14.
3-3-15.
3-3-16.
3-3-17.
3-3-18.
3-3-19.
3-3-21.
3-3-20.
3-3-22.
3-3-23.
3-3-24.
3-3-25.

System connection check ............................................................................. R-92
Remote on .................................................................................................... R-93
Remote off .................................................................................................... R-93
Busy reset ..................................................................................................... R-94
Stock maintenance ....................................................................................... R-95
Drawer for clerk ............................................................................................. R-96
CHK# (Clerk interrupt) .................................................................................. R-96
Order ID change ........................................................................................... R-97
Error log print ................................................................................................ R-98
System re-configuration ................................................................................ R-99
Item Data Capture....................................................................................... R-100
Euro change over ........................................................................................ R-101
Clerk window............................................................................................... R-102
Customer .................................................................................................... R-103
Customer busy reset ................................................................................... R-104
Sound.......................................................................................................... R-104
Print batch maintenance file ....................................................................... R-105
Execute batch maintenance file .................................................................. R-106
Re-index the scanning PLU file ................................................................... R-107
FTP client .................................................................................................... R-108
Licence code entry ...................................................................................... R-108
Maintenance data ....................................................................................... R-109
Printer logo send ......................................................................................... R-110
Clerk number .............................................................................................. R-111
Operation monitor ....................................................................................... R-111

3-4. System command execution............................................................... R-112
3-4-1.
3-4-2.
3-4-3.

X/Z reporting ............................................................................................... R-112
X/Z collection / consolidation ...................................................................... R-114
Remote power control ................................................................................. R-114

3-5. Data communication system .............................................................. R-115
3-5-1.
3-5-2.
3-5-3.

Inline / online connectors ............................................................................ R-115
Hardware interface ...................................................................................... R-116
Inline / online functions ............................................................................... R-118

3-6. Collection / Consolidation system ..................................................... R-119
3-6-1.
3-6-2.
3-6-3.

X/Z collection .............................................................................................. R-121
X/Z consolidation ........................................................................................ R-123
X/Z collection / consolidation ...................................................................... R-126

3-7. Auto-programming function ............................................................... R-129
3-7-1.
3-7-2.

Auto-programming functions ....................................................................... R-129
Auto-program operation and CF card utilities ............................................. R-130

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-87

Manager Operation
3.

Manager operation
This section describes manager operations (such as machine initialization, IPL, manager
functions etc.) of QT-6600.

3-1. Machine initialization
There are three different types of initialization such as INIT, FC, and INIT2.
INIT; Machine initialization, all program and total data are reset.
FC; Flag clear, all program and total data are remained, only the current transaction data
are reset.
INIT2; Machine initialization 2, all program data are remained, only total data are reset.
The procedures of machine initialization are described in the chapter 1 of the programming
manual. The required init code are listed below.
Operation

Init

Flag clear
Init2

Init code
00020000
00010000
00040000
00050000
00060000
00080000
No need
8888888888

Meaning
for the U.S.
for other area (default descriptors are initialized in English)
for other area (default descriptors are initialized in German)
for other area (default descriptors are initialized in French)
for other area (default descriptors are initialized in Spanish)
Arabic (default descriptors are initialized in English)

* See the “INIT code” section to notice the detail information.

3-1-1. INIT
Initialization process is as follows:

Start

Input Init code
(see above)

Hardware reset
All RAM reset

Inline ID definition

File creation 1

Initialization operation
Input date/time, ID etc.

File creation 2

Revise terminal
connection table

Receiving program
from other terminal or
CF card

Initialization result
to E-journal

End

3-1-2. Flag clear
Flag clear process is as follows:

Start

Hardware reset
Initialize work area/
buffers/flags

Menu selection
FC/Init2

Initialization result
to E-journal
Init 2

R-88

End

3-1-3. INIT 2
Initialization 2 process is as follows:

Start

Hardware reset
Initialize work area/
buffers/flags

All totoalizer reset
including E-journal

Menu selection
FC/Init2

End

Flag clear

3-1-4. INIT code
Description
Set the default condition of receipt on/ off.
Area code:
U.S.
Other area (default descriptor in English)
(default descriptor in German)
(default descriptor in French)
(default descriptor in Spanish)
(using Arabic character table)

:2
:1
:4
:5
:6
:8

Choice

Program code

Set off = 0
Set on = 1

Significant
number

;

Always “0”

COM3
Use remote printer-2 : 0
Use remote display : 3

Significant
number

:
D3

Always “0”

;

Always “0”

;

D2
D1

3-2. IPL (Initial Program Loading)
IPL should be made before initializing when the application software has been modified.

3-2-1. IPL
IPL via CF card
Start

ROM check

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Store the receiving
data to Flash

Continue
to INIT

R-89

Manager Operation
IPL via LAN port
Start

Store IPL data
to CF card

Insert CF card
(more than128MB vacant)

IPL from
CF card

Restore
all data

Backup all data
to CF card

Clear IPL data
in the CF card

END

3-2-2. System configuration before IPL operation
Insert the IPL CF card to the terminal or connect PC and target terminal.

IPL source

IPL target

CF card slot is located
on the leftside of the terminal.

CF card

IPL Data

C
C

IPL target

IPL source
IPL Data

LAN port
defined as FTP server
C
C

R-90

3-3. Manager function
Using the manager function makes it possible to control the terminal conditions. The
contents of the manager function are as follows:
1. System connection check
2. Remote on
3. Remote off
4. Busy reset
5. Stock maintenance
6. Drawer for clerk
7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt)
8. Order ID change
9. Error log print
10. System re-configuration
11. Item Data Capture
12. EURO Change over.
13. Clerk window
14. Customer
15. Customer Busy Reset
16. Recording
17. Print batch maintenance file
18. Execute batch maintenance
19. Re-index scanning PLU file
20. Licence code entry
21. FTP client
22. Maintenance data
23. Printer logo send
24. Clerk number
25. Operation monitor

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-91

Manager Operation
3-3-1. System connection check
This command shows the connection status of terminals, and printers.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “1. System Connection Check” and press the
key.
INLINE

System Connection Check
10/100Mbps

#01 MC#01
RS-232C Printer
#02 MC#02
RS-232C Printer
#03 MC#03
RS-232C Printer
:
01 LAN Printer
02 ************

1 2

Physical ID, Logical ID
RS-232C printer recognition (1: printer (1), 2: printer (2), 4: slip printer

1
*
192168000060
192168000061

Un recognized RS-232C printer
LAN printer ID, IP address
Unrecognized LAN printer

0.00
4. After checking the system connection, press the key
to return the previous menu.
Note:
If there is unrecognized terminal there it shows “*” as below.
example) #04 ************

R-92

3-3-2. Remote on
This command is used to power on the terminals connected with the same inline.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “2. Remote On” and press the key.
Remote On
Terminal

All

OK?

YES

0.00

4. Select all terminals or individual terminal, select “YES” to
execute this command.

3-3-3. Remote off
This command is used to power off the terminals connected with the same inline.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “3. Remote Off” and press the key.
Remote Off
Terminal
OK?

All
YES

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. Select all terminals or individual terminal, select “YES” to
execute this command.

R-93

Manager Operation
3-3-4. Busy reset
This command is used to release the busy flag of the check used by other dead terminal.
Executing this command always releases this flag, so please be careful to perform this
operation.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “4. Busy Reset” and press the key.
Busy Reset
Check No.

OK?

YES

0.00
4. Enter the appropriate check number, and then select “YES”
to execute this command.
Busy Reset
Check No.
OK?

12
YES
Normal End

0.00

R-94

3-3-5. Stock maintenance
This command is used to update PLU, scanning PLU, department stock quantities brought
by purchasing or inventory processing.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00

3. Select “5. Stock Maintenance” and press the key.

Manager Mode

Stock Maintenance
1.PLU Stock
2.Scan PLU
3.Department

0.00

4. Select “PLU/ Scan PLU/ Department” and press the
key.

Stock Maintenance
PLU
1.PLU0001
2.PLU0002
3.PLU0003
4.PLU0004
5.PLU0005
6.PLU0006
7.PLU0007
8.PLU0008

↓

0.00
No.
1

Descriptor
PLU0001

No.
1
2

Descriptor
PLU0001
PLU0002

Stock
0.000
0.000
Stock
+100.000
100.000
0.000
0.000

0.00
PLU0001

5. Select the appropriate PLU and press the key.

+100.000

Entered stock quantity
Total stock quantity

6. Enter adjustment (adding) stock value and press the
key. If you want to decrease stock value, press the key
before entering the stock value.
The next PLU appears on the screen.
7. Press the key to terminate this sequence.
8. Press the key to issue receipt.
RECEIPT
Stock Maintenance
No.
Descriptor
Stock
---------------------------------------1 PLU0001
+100.000
100.000
2 PLU0002
0.000
0.000

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-95

Manager Operation
3-3-6. Drawer for clerk
This command is used to designate the drawer 1 ~ 2.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00

Drawer for Clerk
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06

0
0
0
0
0
0

3. Select “6. Drawer for Clerk” and press the key.
The display shows “Clerk name/Drawer No.” list.
4. Select the drawer No. field of the appropriate clerk, enter the
drawer number (1 or 2, “0” means drawer 1), and press the
key.
5. Press the key to return to the previous menu.

0.00

3-3-7. CHK# (Clerk interrupt)
This command is used to designate the check number for clerk interrupt to each clerk.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00

CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06

011111
022222
033333
044444
055555
066666

0.00

R-96

3. Select “7. CHK# (CLK Interrupt)” and press the key.
The display shows “Clerk name / Check No.” list.
4. Select the check No. field of the appropriate clerk, enter the
check number (within 6-digits), and press the key.
5. Press the key to return the previous menu.

3-3-8. Order ID change
This command is used to change the target printer of order temporarily.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
1.System Connection Check
2.Remote On
3.Remote Off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “8. Order ID Change” and press the key.
Order ID Change
Definition Enable
1.Order1
2.Order2
3.Order3
4.Order4

YES
0103
0202
0203
0104

:
15.Order15
16.Order16

0000
0000

OK?

YES

0.00

4. Select “YES” of the Definition Enable field, and enter an
appropriate ID number of each order printer and press the
key. Select “YES” of the last line to execute this
command.

D4D3D2D1

Note: D4 D3 D2 D1
In case of RS-232C printer,
D4D3: Terminal ID number which connects with the printer.
D2D1: 01 = Printer 1, 02 = Printer 2, 03 = Printer 3
In case of LAN printer,
D4D3: Terminal ID number which sends data to the printer.
D2D1: 11 ~ 26 = Printer 1 ~ 16

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-97

Manager Operation
3-3-9. Error log print
This command is used to display / print out the error log file.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
3.Remote off
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↑

↓

0.00
3. Select “9. Error Log Print” and press the key.
ID
#01 MC #01
#03 MC #03

Date Time OPE ERR JOB
0603 1535 1
51 38
0603 1535 22 235 22

0.00
4. The display shows current error log.
Then press the key.
Error Log Print
Do you want to printout?

YES

0.00
5. Press the key if you want to print error log.
If you do not want to print error log, press the key.

RECEIPT
Error Log Print
ID
Date Time OPE ERR JOB
---------------------------------------#01 MC #01
0603 1535
1 51 38
#03 MC #03
0603 1535 22 235 22
#00
0000 0000
0
0
0

R-98

3-3-10. System re-configuration
This command is one procedure of down recovery. It backs the contents of the system
connection table to the original value.
It should be executed under these conditions:
1) After issuing “Open check report”.
2) All terminals are connected and work without any trouble. (Check by system connection
check)
3) No terminal is in registration, collection, consolidation, sending/receiving programs.
4) Activate “System re-configuration” command at the terminal on which the “Cut-off”
icon is lit.

MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

Manager Mode
3.Remote off
↑
4.Busy Reset
5.Stock Maintenance
6.Drawer for Clerk
7.CHK#(CLK Interrupt)
8.Order ID Change
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration ↓

0.00
ß

3. Select “10. System Re-configuration” and press the
key.

Cut-off Master or Backup master icon
System Re-configuration
System Re-configuration
OK?

NO
YES

0.00

4. Choose the option “YES (Perform system re-configuration)
/ NO (Abort this procedure)” and press the key.

ß
* Perform “System Recofiguration” operation at the terminal that
shows system error icon ¶.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-99

Manager Operation
3-3-11. Item Data Capture
You can change the IDC status (capture transaction data or not) by the operation described
below.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↑

↓

0.00
3. Select “11. Item Data Capture” and press the key.
Item Data Capture
Item Data Capture

YES

0.00
4. Choose the option “YES (capture item data) / NO (not capture
item data)” and press the key.

R-100

3-3-12. Euro change over
After this operation, the following subjects are made:
(1) The Euro is defined as main currency and the local is defined as sub currency.
(2) All totals and counts are reset.
(3) Unit prices (department, subdepartment, PLU, 2nd @, shift PLU) are converted
in Euro.
Before “change over operation”,
(1) Issue all reset report including open check report, if necessary.
(2) Sign off all cashier/clerk and stop all operations of all terminals of the system.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↑

↓

0.00
3. Select “12. EURO Change over” and press the key.
EURO Change over
This operation will clear all
of totalizer and change over
EURO/LOCAL system.
Are you sure want to execute
these job?

YES

0.00

4. If you want to proceed this step, press the key. To
abort this step, press the or key.

EURO Change over

Operation Code ?

0.00

5. If you want to proceed this step, enter “8888888888” and
press the key. (It takes a few minutes.)
To abort this step, press the or key.
RECEIPT
EURO Change over
Done update EURO rate and
symbols.
Please check unit price and
fix totalizer euro-in-drawer
title character.

Perform the same operation of all the terminals of the system.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-101

Manager Operation
3-3-13. Clerk window
You can program clerk window contents in the MGR mode.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “13.Clerk Window” and press the key.

Clerk Window
Clerk Window

(Disable)

0.00
4. Press the key to continue.
Clerk Window
Clerk Window
1.(Disable)
2.Clerk window 1
3.Clerk window 2
4.Clerk window 3
5.Clerk window 4
6.Clerk window 5
7.Clerk window 6
8.Clerk window 7

↓

0.00
5. Select the clerk window. If you don’t use clerk window,
select “1.(Disable)”.
Clerk Window 1
Clerk window 1
1.(CLERK RESET)
2.C01
3.C02
4.C03
5.C04
6.C05
7.C06
8.C07

↓

0.00
6. Select the clerk to allocate the clerk window. After this
operation, select the appropriate key in the clerk window.
Clerk Window 1
Use this MENU Sign on
OK?

YES

0.00
7. Press the key to set this program.

R-102

3-3-14. Customer
You can program (add / modify / delete) the customer (name, address etc.) in the MGR
mode.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↑

↓

0.00
3. Select “14.Customer” and press the key.
Cust No.
0
11111 Mr.
22222 Mrs.
33333 Ms.

Name
(New customer)
John SMITH
Jane Parker
Janet Lynn

0.00

Cust No.
Name
Title
Address(1)
Address(2)
Address(3)
Address(4)
Phone No.
Customer GP
New customer

4. Add customer: Select (New customer) and press the .
Then (input the customer No. and) press the in the
next screen.
Modify customer: Select the appropriate customer and press
the .
Delete customer: Select the appropriate customer and press
the .
• If you swipe a card at this timing, “add customer (new card)”
or “modify customer (already programmed card) is performed.

123456

——
——
——
——
——
——
——
——

Group01

Customer name (up to 24 characters)
Customer title (select from sub menu)
Customer address 1 (up to 24 characters)
Customer address 2 (up to 24 characters)
Customer address 3 (up to 24 characters)
Customer address 4 (up to 24 characters)
Customer phone No. (up to 12 digits)
Customer group (select from sub menu)

YES

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

5. Press the to set and continue to program other
customer.

R-103

Manager Operation
3-3-15. Customer busy reset
This command is used to release the busy flag of the customer used by other dead terminal.
Executing this command always releases this flag, so please be careful to perform this
operation.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

0.00
3. Select “15. Customer Busy Reset” and press the key.
4. Enter the appropriate customer number, and then select
“YES” to execute this command.

Customer Busy Reset
Cust No.
OK?

RECEIPT

YES

0.00

Busy Reset
CUST No.123456
Dr.
Big Scientist
BALANCE
DISCOUNT

$45.90
$3.23

3-3-16. Sound
This command is used to play the programmed sound file or to record to the sound file.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
9.Error Log Print
10.System Re-configuration
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “16. Recording” and press the key.
Recording

1.Sound
2.Sound
3.Sound
4.Sound
5.Sound
6.Sound
7.Sound
8.Sound

WAV File
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

4. Enter the appropriate sound file, press to play, press
to record.

↓

0.00

R-104

3-3-17. Print batch maintenance file
This command is used to print batch maintenance file.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
10.System Re-configuration ↑
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
↓

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

0.00
3. Select “17. Print Batch Mainte” and press the key.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
10.System Re-configuration ↑
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk
Print Window
Batvh Maint File
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
↓
17.Print Batch Mainte

0.00

RECEIPT
Print Batch Maint File
Delete/Change
#4917770088>>>>>
Scan PLU0001
Group Link
Dept Link
Sub-Dept Link
Taxable status
Scan Mix&Match
Negative Price
Zero Unit Price
Open PLU
Item Follows Department
Compulsory Multiply
Not Allowed Multiplication

Change
$12.34
-------DEPT01
-------Non Tax
-------NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO

491077008
:

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-105

Manager Operation
3-3-18. Execute batch maintenance file
This command is used to execute batch maintenance file.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
11.Item Data Capture
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.Execute Batch Maint

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “18. Execute Batch Mainte” and press the key.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
11.Item Data Capture
↑
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
Z-report
for Scan item done ?
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
↓
18.Execute Batch Maint

0.00
4. Press the key if Scan item Z report has already issued.
Execute Batch Maintenance
Execute Batch Maintenance

OK?

YES

0.00
5. Select “YES” and press the key.
Execute Batch Maintenance
Execute Batch Maintenance
OK?

YES
YES

Batch Maintenance Finish !

0.00

6. Display “Batch Maintenance Finished” and return the root
screen automatically.

RECEIPT
(Normal end)
Batch Maintenance Finish !

(Error end)
Print error item.

Scan PLU001
Scan PLU023

NG
NG
:

R-106

3-3-19. Re-index the scanning PLU file
This command is used to re-index the scanning PLU file.
After this command, send the scanning PLU file to all terminals of the cluster.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
12.EURO Change over
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
19.Re-Index Scan file

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “19. Re-index Scan File” and press the key.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Manager Mode
12.EURO Change over
↑
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer
Z-report forBusy
ScanReset
item done ?
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
↓
19.Re-Index Scan file

0.00
4. Press the key if Scan item Z report has already issued.
Re-Index Scan File
Re-index Scan File
OK?

NO
YES

0.00

5. Select “YES” and press the key.

Re-Index Scan File
Re-index Scan File
OK?

YES
YES

Re-index Scan File !

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

6. Display “Re-index Scan File” and return the root screen
automatically.

R-107

Manager Operation
3-3-20. Licence code entry
This command is used to enter the software licence code.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
13.Clerk Window
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
19.Re-Index Scan file
20.Licence Code Entry

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00
3. Select “20. Licence code entry” and press the key.
Licence Code Entry
Licence Code Entry
OK?

YES

0.00

4. Enter the licence code and press the key and select
“YES” and press the key.

3-3-21. FTP client
MGR

C01

You can execute FTP client processing by the operation below.
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

Manager Mode
14.Customer
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
19.Re-Index Scan file
20.Licence Code Entry
21.FTP Clint

↑

↓

0.00
3. Select “21. FTP Client” and press the key.
FTP Client
FTP SERVER
1.HEAD OFFICE
2.FTP SERVER 2
3.FTP SERVER 3
4.FTP SERVER 4
5.FTP SERVER 5
6.FTP SERVER 6
7.FTP SERVER 7
8.FTP SERVER 8

↓

0.00

R-108

4. Select the appropriate FTP server in the list, and press
.

FTP Client

1.FTP
2.FTP
3.FTP
4.FTP
5.FTP
6.FTP
7.FTP
8.FTP

FTP FILE
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
FILE 5
FILE 6
FILE 7
FILE 8

↓

0.00

FTP SERVER
FTP FILE

5. Select the appropriate FTP file in the list, and press .
The process programmed in the file 912 / 913 is executed.

FTP Client
HEAD OFFICE
Daily PLU
Normal End

0.00
6. Check the execution result and press to exit.

3-3-22. Maintenance data
This command is used to backup the maintenance data to the CF card or clear the data in
the internal flash memory.
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
15.Customer Busy Reset
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
19.Re-Index Scan file
20.Licence Code Entry
21.FTP Client
22.Maintenance Data

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00

3. Select “22. Maintenance Data” and press the key.

Maintenance Data

Maintenance Data
1.Data Backup to CF
2.Maintenance Data Clear

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. Select “Data backup to CF” and press the key.

R-109

Manager Operation
Maintenance Data

File name

LOGFILE.???

OK?

YES

0.00

5. You can enter file prefix, if you want to change. And select
“YES” and press the key.
The log file contains;
• System error log: LOGFILE.148 (file-148, 149)
• Operation log: LOGFILE.248 (file-248, 249)
• Packet log: LOGFILE.348 (file-348, 349)

Maintenance Data

LOG FILE.???
Are you sure to backup?

0.00

6. Insert the CF card and press the key.

• In case of selecting “Maintenance Data Clear”, the terminal clears file-148, 248, 348, 149, 249 and
349.

3-3-23. Printer logo send
This command is used to send the edited printer logo to the external (RS-232C/ LAN)
printer(s).
MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Manager Mode
16.Recording
17.Print Batch Mainte
18.EXECUTE BATCH MAINT
19.Re-Index Scan file
20.Licence Code Entry
21.FTP Client
22.Maintenance Data
23.Printer Logo Send

000000

↑

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign manager mode.

↓

0.00

3. Select “23. Printer Logo Send” and press the key.

Printer Logo Send

Printer Logo Send
1.RS-232C Printer
2.LAN Printer

0.00

R-110

4. Select appropriate pritnter “RS-232C printer / LAN printer”
and press the key.

(RS-232C printer)
RS-232C Printer
Normal End
Error End

/1
/2

xxxx

0.00

normal end
error end (error code)

5. Execute this command at the terminal which is connected
with RS-232C printer(s).

(LAN printer)
LAN Printer
Normal End
Error End

L1
L2

xxxx

0.00

normal end
error end (error code)

5. Execute this command at a terminal in the cluster.

3-3-24. Clerk number
MGR C01
001111 C01
002222 C02
003333 C03
004444 C04

You can program clerk number directly to the key in the MGR mode.
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
10-10-01 12:34
000000
097
2. Press and to assign manager mode.
098
099
3. Enter “00” and the clerk number you want to set and press the
100
appropriate key.
(Entering “000000” clears the clerk number program.)

Hard key code

C 04

0
4. To terminate this step, press the key.

3-3-25. Operation monitor
You can monitor a clerk’s operation by monitoring display.

MGR

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press to assign manager mode.
3. Enter “99990000nn (nn: terminal ID No. to monitor)” and
press the to start operation monitor.
Note: Do not designate the monitored or monitoring terminal.
The display shows the screen of the monitored terminal.

Start...

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. Press twice break the monitoring.

R-111

Manager Operation
3-4. System command execution
System command functions are provided to perform nonregistration operations, such as
collection / consolidation system control, backup / restore operation of files in the
terminals, and remote power on / off control.
This chaptershows the X/Z code system for your reference.

3-4-1. X/Z reporting
X/Z command execution
1. Issuing flash report
X/Z mode → or , , ,
2. Issuing other reports
X/Z mode → D7D6D5D4D3D2D1 <#-1>
Meaning of the command data (Scanning/ not found PLU)
Digit
D7
D6

D4
D3
D2D1

R-112

Value
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
0
26
27

Meaning
Always
Always
Scanning PLU or Not found PLU report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLU sales by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLU stock by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLUout of stock by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLUbest 50 amount by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLUbest 50quantity by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLU 0 sales by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Scanning PLU or Not found PLU inactive by group/ department/ subdepartment report
Execution in X mode
Execution in Z mode
Edit employee data
Always
Scanning PLU
Not found PLU

Meaning of the command data (Other report)
Digit

D6
D5

D2D1

Value
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
71
00 ~ 09
11
12
14
64
13
15
16
17
19
20
23
25
28
58
91
22
24
29
29
31
52
58
60
61
66
67
68
69

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Meaning
No edition
Editing by group
Editing by department
Editing by subdepartment
Editing by order character
No extraction
Inactive (Zero sales)
No extraction
By Range
Clerk individual
Execution in X mode
Execution in Z mode
Edit employee data
Issuing daily area
Issuing periodic 1 area
Issuing periodic 2 area
Issuing daily consolidation area
Issuing periodic 1 consolidation area
Issuing periodic 2 consolidation area
Flash
Batch report 1 ~ 10
Fixed totalizer
Transaction
PLU
PLU stock
Subdepartment
Department
Group
Clerk
Time zone
Monthly
Simple Time & attendance
Open check
Table analysis
Electronic Journal
Electronic journal (search by date and consecutive number)
Void reason
Hourly / Labor
Employee
Employee activity
Hourly item
Customer group
Electronic journal
Intelligent electronic journal
Mix & matce
Scan mix & match
IDC (1) clear
IDC (2) clear
IDC (3) clear

R-113

Manager Operation
3-4-2. X/Z collection / consolidation
X/Z collection / consolidation execution
Inline X/Z mode → D14D13D12D11D10D9D8D7D6D5D4D3D2D1 <#-2> →
Meaning of the command data
Digit
D14~D10
D9D8

D6
D5
D4
D3

D2D1

Value
11110
11111
11112
00
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
00 ~ 09
11
12
14
64
13
15
16
17
19
20
22
24
26
28
31
58
61
66

Meaning
Collection
Consolidation
Collection and Consolidation
Fixed
No edition
Editing by group
Editing by department
Editing by subdepartment
Editing by order character
No extraction
Inactive (Zero sales)
No extraction
By Range
Execution in X mode
Execution in Z mode
Issuing daily area
Issuing periodic 1 area
Issuing periodic 2 area
Batch report 1 ~ 10
Fixed totalizer
Transaction
PLU
PLU stock
Subdepartment
Department
Group
Clerk
Time zone
Monthly
Void reason
Hourly labor
Scanning PLU
Table analysis
Hourly item
Electronic Journal
Mix & match
Scan mix & match

3-4-3. Remote power control
Remote power control execution
Manager mode → D4D3D2D1 <#-2>
Meaning of the command data
Digit
D4D3
D2D1

R-114

Value
00
01 ~ 32
10
11

Meaning
All terminal
Terminal ID of individual terminal
Remote power on
Remote power off

3-5. Data communication system
The following details the inline and online data communication functions available with
the QT-6600 system.

3-5-1. Inline / online connectors
With the QT-6600, there are the following inline / online connectors in the rear side of the
body.
Inline
RS-232C COM1
RS-232C COM2
RS-232C COM3
RS-232C COM4
RS-232C COM5
RS-232C COM6

(Standard)
(Standard)
(Standard)
(Standard)
(Standard)
(Standard)
(Standard)

Ethernet
For MODEM, or PC
For Hand held scanner, Slip printer or Scale
For Remote customer display
For Remote printer, or Slip printer
For Remote printer
For Remote printer

Bottom side of the terminal

PS/2 keyboard
From the AC adaptor

Inline (10/100Base-T)

LAN

DISPLAY

SCANNER

PC/MODEM

PS/2
KEYBOARD

COM3

COM1

COM2
COM5

COM6

COM4

SPK

MIC

Drawer 2
Drawer 1
Ext. microphone
Ext. speaker

Brightness

COM6

COM3

QT-6600 Reference Manual

COM2

COM5

COM1

COM4

R-115

Manager Operation
3-5-2. Hardware interface
3-5-2-1. Inline interface
The maximum inline cable length and the maximum connection unit will be varied by
the inline communication speed as shown below figure.
• Using 10BASE-T
Cable length: 100m (hub to terminal, hub to hub)
Maximum 4 hubs in one cluster.
Maximum cable length between terminal and terminal via hubs is 500m.
• Using 100Base-TX
Cable length: 100m (hub to terminal, hub to hub)
Maximum 2 hubs in one cluster.
Maximum cable length between terminal and terminal via hubs is 300m.

Terminal to terminal
¥ 10BASE-T
¥ 100BASE-TX
Max.100m

C
C

Max.100m cross cable

Max.100m

C
C

Configuration with Hub
¥ 10BASE-T
Max.100m

C
C

Max.100m

C
C

Max.100m

C
C

Max.500m
¥ 100BASE-TX

Max.100m

C
C

Max.300m

R-116

Max.100m

C
C

3-5-2-2. Online interface
Only the RS-232C COM 1 port can be connected with a modem or a personal computer.
1) Specification of RS-232C COM 1 port
Communication method:
Half duplex communication
Configuration of connection: Point-to point
Line type:
Public lines / exclusive lines
Starting method:
Center (host computer) based start up
Protocol:
Async.
Communication speed:
2400 / 4800 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600 / 115200 bps
Error control:
CRC-128 or CRC-1024
Text length:
128 or 1024 bytes
2) The cable diagram between the terminal and MODEM
3) The cable diagram between the terminal and PC

Terminal (COM 1)

MODEM

Terminal (COM 1)
Pin Signal
No. name

Pin
No.

Signal
name

Pin
No.

Signal Pin Pin
name No. No.

SD/TDX

RD/RXD

2 RD/RXD

RS/RTS

CS/CTS

CD/DCD

1 CD/DCD

ER/DTR

DR/DSR

6 DR/DSR

CI/RI

GND

(DSUB25)

22
5

(DSUB25)
(DSUB9)

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-117

Manager Operation
3-5-3. Inline / online functions
3-5-3-1. Inline functions
The list below shows the main functions available with the QT-6600 system.
In case of these functions below are executed, the satellite terminal can receive these
commands even if the satellite terminal is in OFF mode.
1) X/Z data collection for each terminal
2) X/Z data consolidation for each terminal
3) X/Z data collection / consolidation for each terminal
4) Program data copy and upload between terminals (auto-program function)
Functions 1), 2) and 3) can only be performed from a terminal that is programmed as master
in which consolidation files are allocated or PC.

3-5-3-2. Online functions
The QT-6600 can be controlled from the personal computer by connecting it to RS-232C
port 1 (COM1).
In case of sending a command from PC, the terminal can receive this command even if the
terminal is in OFF mode.

R-118

3-6. Collection / Consolidation system
This section provides the general description of the data collection / consolidation system
of the QT-6600. The collection / consolidation system is managed by the master/satellite
system using inline network. Installation of any special hardware devices is not required
for collection / consolidation as inline interfaces are standard feature. Communication is
possible with the connection of inline cable.
In this section, the term “master” means a terminal which collects or consolidates data
registered on each terminal (called “satellite”) connected the inline.
The differences between collection and consolidation are as follows.
– Collection
Outputs the data of the master and individual satellite terminals from the master terminal.
– Consolidation
Totals data from the master and satellites, and then output it to a specific device.
– Collection / Consolidation
Collection and consolidation are performed at the same time.

Types of totalizer files
There are following seven types of totalizer files:
– Daily total files
Daily total files accumulate registered data.
– Periodic total 1 files
These files accumulate registered data at the point of sale, and can be reset independently
from the daily total files. Therefore, the total data within specific period can be accessed
by using these files.
– Periodic total 2 files
These files have same functions as the periodic total 1 files, but can reset independently
for getting the different periodic total data within different period.
– Daily consolidation files
These are files to consolidate the daily data.
– Periodic total 1 consolidation files
These are files to consolidate the periodic 1 data.
– Periodic total 2 consolidation files
These are files to consolidate the periodic 2 data.
– Consolidation work files
These files are work files to collect or consolidate the data of daily total, periodic total 1
or periodic total 2 files.
The daily consolidation files, periodic total 1 consolidation files, periodic total 2 consolidation files and consolidation work files must be reserved as work files at the master
terminal during collection / consolidation operations.
NOTE:
Only a file with the same number of records as the records of corresponding daily total files
need to be reserved. For example, if the number of department is 50, then the same number,
50 records, should be reserved for department of other types.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-119

Manager Operation
File description and number list
Terminal files
File
description
Fixed totalizer
Transaction key
Subdepartment
PLU
Department
Group
Clerk detail
Hourly sales
Monthly sales
Void table
Table analysis
Grand total
Hourly item
Hourly labor
Mix & match
Scan Mix & match
Customer group
Shift PLU
Scanning PLU

R-120

Daily
total
001
002
003
004
005
006
011
009
010
012
018
020
021
014
051
056
042
055
016

Periodic 1
total
101
102
103
104
105
106
111
109
110
112
118
120
121
114
151
156
142
155
---

Consolidation files
Periodic 2
total
201
202
203
204
205
206
211
209
210
212
218
220
221
214
251
256
242
255
---

Daily
consolidation
301
302
303
304
305
306
311
309
310
312
318
320
321
314
351
356
342
355
---

Periodic 1
consolidation
401
402
403
404
405
406
411
409
410
412
418
420
421
414
451
456
442
455
---

Periodic 2
consolidation
501
502
503
504
505
506
511
509
510
512
518
520
521
514
551
556
542
555
---

Consolidation
work
601
602
603
604
605
606
611
609
610
612
618
620
621
614
651
656
642
655
---

3-6-1. X/Z collection
This function is used to obtain the counters and totals of the individual terminals.
3-6-1-1. X collection processing
X collection processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
Consolidation
work

1 An X collection command is started up from the master terminal.
2 One objected terminal sends its report data to the consolidation work file of the master.
3 Report data from the objected terminal file are printed out on the master's printer.
4 After processing of the master terminal completes, the same processes described in the
item 1 to 3 are executed for the other terminals. Data will be sent without the clerk
noticing, even when the satellite in the process of registering.
3-6-1-2. Z collection processing
Z collection processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1, 4
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
2

Consolidation
work

1 When a Z collection command is started up from the master terminal, the master first
locks one objected terminal. (Z lock)
2 The objected terminal sends its report data to the consolidation work file of the master
terminal.
3 Report data from the satellite terminal file are printed out on the master’s printer.
4 The same processes described in the item 1 to 3 are executed for the other terminals.
5 After the processing of the master terminal completes, the data of objected terminal file
are cleared, and then the Z lock of the objected terminal is released.
NOTE:
• When a Z collection is performed, the consolidation data cannot be output. If output of
consolidation data is desired, perform “collection/consolidation” processing described
later.
• Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected
remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-121

Manager Operation
3-6-1-3. X/Z collection command execution

X/Z

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and .

Inline X/Z
1.Collection
2.Consolidation
3.Collection & Consolidation

C 01

0.00
3. Select “1. Collection” and press the key.
Collection

Collection
1.Daily
X
2.Periodic(1) X
3.Periodic(2) X
Collection Z
4.Daily
5.Periodic(1) Z
6.Periodic(2) Z
Daily X
1.Batch
2.Cashier/Clerk
3.Customer Account
4.Others

C 01

0.00
4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.
(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types
and kinds.)

0.00

Collection
Target ECR
1.All
2.Terminal A
3.Terminal B
4.Terminal C
5.Terminal D
6.Terminal E
7.Terminal F
8.Terminal G

#01
#02
--#04
#05
#06
#07

C 01

← Selected terminal

0.00

5. Select the target terminal(s) and press key.
In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the
key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

Collection
Inline
Collection
MC #01
MC #02
MC #03
MC #04

C 01

12:30
12:32
Error End
12:40

11110
0
0021 ←
0022
0001 ←
0020

Reset counter
Error code

0.00
6. Press the key twice to terminate or to cancelthis
process.

NOTE:
• If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/
NS>) before issuing report.

R-122

3-6-2. X/Z consolidation
This function is used to obtain the sum of counters and totals of all objected terminals in
the store.
After consolidating data from all objected terminals, the master prints the details on the
printer.
Regardless of whether they are in the process of registration, the satellite terminals send
data and do not print out the reports, when X consolidation is performed. But, during the
Z consolidation, satellites are locked from registrations.
3-6-2-1. X consolidation processing
X consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
2

Consolidation
work

Consolidation
files

1 An X consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.
2 Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the
consolidation work file.
3 The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.
4 The same process described in item 1 to 3 is executed for other terminals.
5 After the above collection processing is completed for all objected terminals, the data
accumulated in the consolidation work file are reported on the master's printer.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-123

Manager Operation
3-6-2-2. Z consolidation processing (except scanning PLU)
Z consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1, 6
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
Consolidation
work

Consolidation
files

1 A Z consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.
The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)
2 Data of the objected terminal files are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the
consolidation work file.
3 The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.
4 After the processing of the master terminal completes, the same processes described in
item 1 to 3 are executed for all other terminals.
5 The data accumulated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's printer.
6 After the above collection processing completes for all objected terminals, the files of
all objected terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.
3-6-2-3. Z consolidation processing (scanning PLU)
Z consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1, 5
Satellite
Terminal
files

Master
2, 3

Terminal
files

1 A Z consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.
The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)
2 Data of the objected terminal files are sent to the master terminal, and are added to the
master terminal file.
3 Step 2 are executed for all other teminals.
4 The data accumulated in the master terminal file are reported on the master's printer.
6 After the above processing completes for all objected terminals, the files of all objected
terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.
NOTE:
• Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected
remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released. Therefore, retrying
the same operation can be performed.

R-124

3-6-2-4. X/Z consolidation command execution
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
X/Z C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press and to assign Inline X/Z.
Inline X/Z
1.Collection
2.Consolidation
3.Collection & Consolidation

C 01

0.00
3. Select “2. Consolidation” and press the key.
Consolidation

Consolidation
1.Daily
X
2.Periodic(1) X
3.Periodic(2) X
Consolidation Z
4.Daily
5.Periodic(1) Z
6.Periodic(2) Z
Daily X
1.Batch
2.Cashier/Clerk
3.Customer Account
4.Others

C 01

0.00

C 01

4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.
(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types
and kinds.)

0.00
Consolidation
Target
1.All
2.Terminal
3.Terminal
4.Terminal
5.Terminal
6.Terminal
7.Terminal
8.Terminal

ECR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

#01
#02
--#04
#05
#06
#07

C 01

← Selected terminal

0.00

5. Select the target terminals and press the key.
In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the
key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

Consolidation
Inline
Consolidation
MC #01
MC #02
MC #03
MC #04

C 01

11111
0
0021 ←
0022
0001 ←
0020

12:30
12:32
Error End
12:40

Reset counter
Error code

0.00
6. Press the key twice to terminate or to cancel this
process.

NOTE:
• If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/
NS>) before issuing report.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-125

Manager Operation
3-6-3. X/Z collection / consolidation
This function is used to obtain the counters and totals of the individual terminals
(collection) and of all objected terminals in the store (consolidation) by one procedure.
After printing collection report on the master's printer, the master prints the consolidation
report. Regardless whether they are in the process of registration, the satellite terminals
send data and do not print out the reports, when X collection / consolidation is performed.
But, during the Z collection / consolidation, satellites are locked from registrations.
After consolidating data from all objected terminals, the master prints the details on the
printer.
3-6-2-1. X collection/consolidation processing
X collection/consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.
1 An X collection / consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.

1
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
2

Consolidation
work

4
Consolidation
files

2 Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the
consolidation work file.
3 The data in the consolidation work file is reported on the master's R/J printer.
4 The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.
5 The same process described in item 1 to 4 is executed for other terminals.
6 After the above collection processing is completed for all terminals, the data accumulated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's R/J printer.

R-126

3-6-3-2. Z collection / consolidation processing
Z collection/consolidation processing is performed as the figure shown below.

1, 7
Satellite

Master

Terminal
files

2
2

Consolidation
work

4
Consolidation
files

1 A Z collection / consolidation command is started up from the master terminal.
The master first locks an objected terminal. (Z lock)
2 Data of the objected terminal file are sent to the master terminal, and are copied to the
consolidation work file.
3 The data in the consolidation work file are reported on the master's printer.
4 The data in the consolidation work file is added to the consolidation file.
5 After the master terminal's processing completes, the same processes described in item
1 to 4 are executed for all other terminals.
6 The data accumulated in the consolidation file are reported on the master's printer.
7 After the above collection processing completes for all terminals, the files of all satellite
terminals are cleared, and then satellite's Z lock statuses are released.
NOTE:
• Even if an error is occurred, or if the processing is terminated, the data to be collected
remains as they are, and Z lock statuses are automatically released. Therefore, retrying
the same operation can be performed.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-127

Manager Operation
3-6-2-3. X/Z collection / consolidation command execution
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press the and key to assign Inline X/Z.
X/Z

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Inline X/Z
1.Collection
2.Consolidation
3.Collection & Consolidation

C 01

0.00

3. Select “3. Collection & Consolidation” and press the
key.

Collection&Consolidation

Collection&Consolidation
1.Daily
X
2.Periodic(1) X
3.Periodic(2) X
Collection&Consolidation
4.Daily
Z
5.Periodic(1) Z
6.Periodic(2) Z
Daily X
1.Batch
2.Cashier/Clerk
3.Customer Acoount
4.Others

C 01

0.00

C 01

4. Select the types and kinds you want to collect.
(Please refer to the X/Z report chapter about the report types
and kinds.)

0.00

Collection&Consolidation
Target
1.All
2.Terminal
3.Terminal
4.Terminal
5.Terminal
6.Terminal
7.Terminal
8.Terminal

C 01

ECR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

#01
#02
--#04
#05
#06
#07

← Selected terminal

0.00

Collection&Consolidation
Inline
Collection&Conso
MC #01
12:30
MC #02
12:32
MC #03
Error End
MC #04
12:40

C 01

11112
0
0021 ←
0022
0001 ←
0020

0.00

5. Select the target terminals and press the key.
In case of selecting individual terminal(s), press the
key when you finish to designate terminal(s).

Reset counter
Error code

6. Press the key twice to terminate or to cancel this
process.

NOTE:
• If money declaration compulsory is set, enter in drawer amount and press <#> (or <#/
NS>) before issuing report.

R-128

3-7. Auto-programming function
Using the auto programming function makes it possible to save and load the terminal
program files. Methods available for saving the terminal program are as follows:
1) Saving onto another terminal connected through inline.
2) Saving onto a personal computer connected through inline/ online.
3) Saving onto a CF card inserted in the CF card slot.
To ensure quick recovery from a corrupted file resulting from user error or system failure,
it is recommended that you maintain back up copies of current terminal programs on a file
basis.
Terminal program files can be loaded using procedures opposite to those used for saving.
Note:
Data except for program data, such as data in totalizers, counters, and work area, cannot
be saved by the auto programming function. (except for copying all data)
Caution:
Do not remove a CF card during sending / receiving data from/to it.

3-7-1. Auto-programming functions
The QT-6600 terminal is capable of saving and loading terminal program files. The
terminal program file has the following transfer functions:
1) Copy all terminal files (send / receive)
(send: activation by source terminal / receive: activation by target terminal)
This function copies all terminal files with counters and totalizers. When a file is not
reserved on the target terminal, that file is created automatically.
2) Copy all terminal program files (send / receive)
This function copies all terminal files without counters and totalizers. When a file is not
reserved on the target terminal, the processing for that file is skipped.
3) Copy individual terminal program files (send / receive)
This function copies the specific terminal program file (except system work files)
without counters and totalizers.
4) Copy unit price field of particular files (send / receive)
This function copies the unit price field of specific files (i.e. PLU, PLU 2nd@).

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-129

Manager Operation
3-7-2. Auto-program operation and CF card utilities

X/Z

The procedures of auto program function
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)
C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press the and key to assign “AUTO
PGM.”
AUTO PGM
1.Send
2.Receive

0.00

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the
guidance. The hierarchy of the AUTO PGM menus are
described below.

Auto-program menu hierarchy

Send / Receive

Copy All
Unit Price only
Range
(Send only)
Individual Files

R-130

All Data
All PGM
PLU
PLU 2nd@
PLU
PLU 2nd@
Fixed Totalizer
Free Function
Sub Department
PLU
Department
Group Character
Cashier / Clerk
Void
Scanning PLU
Multi EAN file
Batch Maintenance
NLU File
Non PLU table
Scan Mix & Match
Table Analysis
GT Character
General Feature
Special Character
Report Header
Tax Table
Pulldown Group
Set Menu Table
Clerk key ID
Batch X / Z
Clerk Detail
Receipt / SLIP Msg
Endorse Message
ARG GP1
ARG GP2
ARG GP3
ARG GP4
ARG GP5
Text Recall
Check Print
Graphic Logo
PLU 2nd@
Shift PLU
Scheduler
Order Char Link

Keyboard
Character Keyboard
System Connection
I / O Parameter
Printer Connection
Hourly/Item Link
Mix & match
Time Zone
Employee
Job Code
Schedule
IDC Link
Euro (Sub Currency) Prese
Auto Pgm control
Screen Color
Customer
Customer GP
Customer Title
Menu Title
CF X/Z Conv
Check Window
Clerk Window
Sound (1)
Sound (2)
:
Sound (10)
Color Definition
Color Theme
BMP Picture
Additional BMP Picture
FTP Login Password
FTP Server Name
FTP Trans File
User logo
Check Window 21
Check Window 22
Check Window 23
Keys for Check Window
Free Function List
Tare Table
Additional PLU Character
Additional Item Program
Additional Order Control
Sign Off Reason
PC Keyboard
TCP/IP

X/Z

The procedure of Data Backup to the CF card
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)
C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press the key to assign “CF card.”
CF Card
1.Data Backup
2.Data Restore
3.Backup File List
4.CF Card Format

0.00

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the
guidance. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.
The hierarchy of the Data Backup is described below.

Data Backup menu hierarchy

Backup

Copy All
Individual Files

QT-6600 Reference Manual

All Data
All PGM
Fixed Totalizer
Free Function
Sub Department
PLU
Department
Group Character
Cashier / Clerk
Void
Scanning PLU
Multi EAN file
Batch Maintenance
NLU File
Non PLU table
Scan Mix & Match
Table Analysis
GT Character
General Feature
Special Character
Report Header
Tax Table
Pulldown Group
Set Menu Table
Clerk key ID
Batch X / Z
Clerk Detail
Receipt / SLIP Msg
Endorse Message
ARG GP1
ARG GP2
ARG GP3
ARG GP4
ARG GP5
Text Recall
Check Print
Graphic Logo
PLU 2nd@
Shift PLU
Scheduler
Order Char Link

Keyboard
Character Keyboard
System Connection
I / O Parameter
Printer Connection
Hourly/Item Link
Mix & match
Time Zone
Employee
Job Code
Schedule
IDC Link
Euro (Sub Currency) Preset
Auto Pgm control
Screen Color
Customer
Customer GP
Customer Title
Menu Title
CF X/Z Conv
Check Window
Clerk Window
Sound (1)
Sound (2)
:
Sound (10)
Color Definition
Color Theme
BMP Picture
Additional BMP Picture
FTP Login Password
FTP Server Name
FTP Trans File
User logo
Check Window 21
Check Window 22
Check Window 23
Keys for Check Window
Free Function List
Tare Table
TCP/IP

R-131

Manager Operation
X/Z

The procedure of Data Restore from the CF card
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)
C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press the and key to assign “CF
card.”
CF Card
1.Data Backup
2.Data Restore
3.Backup File List
4.CF Card Format

0.00
3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.
Select “2. Data Restore” and press the key.
X/Z

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000000

Data Restore
1.FILE004P.004
2.FILE090P.090
3.FILE028P.028

0.00
4. Select the appropriate file you want to restore.

R-132

X/Z

The procedures of taking the file list of the CF card and deleting the file
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)
C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press the and key to assign “CF
card.”
CF Card
1.Data Backup
2.Data Restore
3.Backup File List
4.CF Card Format

0.00

3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.
Select “3. Backup File List” and press the key.

Backup File List
FILE001P.001
10-10-01 10:00
FILE002P.002
10-10-01 10:01
FILE003P.003
10-10-01 10:02

0.00

4. In case of deleting a file, select the appropriate file and press
the key.

The procedures of formatting the CF card
1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary)
X/Z C01
10-10-01 12:34
000000
2. Press the and key to assign “CF
card.”
CF Card
1.Data Backup
2.Data Restore
3.Backup File List
4.CF Card Format

0.00

X/Z

C01

10-10-01 12:34

3. Insert the CF card to the slot securely.
Select “4. CF Card Format” and press the key.

000000

This procedure deletes all
data in the CF Card.
Are you sure to format?

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. Press the key to continue formatting, means
abortion.

R-133

Manager Operation

R-134

Registrations ........................................................................................ R-134
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
4-13.
4-14.
4-15.
4-16.
4-17.
4-18.
4-19.
4-20.
4-21.
4-22.
4-23.

Clerk sign on / off operation ............................................................................ R-134
Voiding the last registered item ( key operation) ................................ R-135
Voiding the previous registered item ( key operation)......................... R-136
Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction .................................. R-136
Using the list function ...................................................................................... R-138
Using the set menu function and pulldown group function .............................. R-139
Post entry ........................................................................................................ R-142
Separate check ............................................................................................... R-143
Open check ..................................................................................................... R-144
Split payment (Dutch account) ........................................................................ R-144
Media change.................................................................................................. R-145
Eat-in / Takeout ............................................................................................... R-146
Scanning PLU ................................................................................................. R-146
Shift PLU ......................................................................................................... R-149
Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)........................................ R-149
Round repeat function ..................................................................................... R-150
Mix & match / coupon ...................................................................................... R-151
Customer ......................................................................................................... R-152
Table sharing ................................................................................................... R-153
Order character change .................................................................................. R-153
Item search ..................................................................................................... R-153
Scan Mix & match ........................................................................................... R-154
Time calculation .............................................................................................. R-155
Additional PLU character ................................................................................ R-156

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-135

Registration
4.

Registrations
This section describes characteristic registrations of the QT-6600.
Key catch tone, error tone volume can be controlled by the key.

4-1.

Clerk sign on / off operation

The following examples illustrate the clerk sign on / off operation.
• When an i-Button key is used, sign on operation can be performed by attaching the clerk
key to the receiver by the appropriate i-Button key.
Note: After initialization, i-Button key ID should be set.
• When a clerk ID number is programmed for the clerk key, sign on operation can be
performed by merely pressing the clerk key on the keyboard or in the clerk pop-up
window.
It is the same procedure that even clerks are assigned as “clerk”, “cashier” or “manager.”
Clerk sign on operation (Clerk key has the clerk number setting.)
Clerk window 1

REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

REG

000001
C01

C02

C03

C04

C05

C06

C07

C08

C09

C10

Mode

Please sign on.

(clerk pop-up window)
NEXT

REG

CLK#

1. Just press the appropriate key in the keyboard or
in the clerk pop-up window.
Clerk sign on operation (Clerk key has no clerk number setting.)
In case of the store has many clerks to control, you need not allocate all clerk keys on the
keyboard but allocate a few clerk key and program no clerk number one of the clerk key.
10-10-01 12:34

000001

---Please sign on.

R-136

1. Press the key, if you want to display no clerk
number entries.

REG

10-10-01 12:34

CLK#

000001

--**
2. Enter the appropriate clerk number and press the
key.

Please sign on.

Clerk sign off operation

REG C01

10-10-01 12:34

000001

0.00
Please sign on.

1. Enter “0” and press the key.

4-2.

Voiding the last registered item ( key operation)
Use the key to cancel a data that has just been registered using a function key. The
key can be used to cancel data registered using departments, subdepartments,
PLUs, scan PLUs, partial tenders, or the , <+>, <–>, <%+>, <%–>, or
key. You can only use the key to cancel a registration if you have not
yet started registration of the next item.
REG C01
1 PLU0001
10%
%-

10-10-01 12:34

-0.10

%1 ST
REG C01
1 PLU0001

000001
•1.00

10-10-01 12:34

VOID
1 ST

-0.10
•0.90

1. Wrong registration is made.

000001
•1.00

•0.10
•1.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Press the key to cancel the data and reregister the
transaction.

R-137

Registration
4-3.

Voiding the previous registered item ( key operation)
If data has been registered using a function key and registration of the next item has begun,
use the key to cancel previous registered data. Entries using departments,
subdepartments, PLUs or scan PLUs can be cancelled using the key.
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
3 PLU0003
1 PLU0004

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0004

•4.00
•16.00

6
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
3 PLU0003
1 PLU0004

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0004

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0003

4-4.

2. Press the or key to
designate the item registration.

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•4.00

-9.00
•7.00

3 ST

1. Wrong registration is made.

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•9.00
•4.00

•4.00
•16.00

6
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0004

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•9.00
•4.00

3. Press the key to cancel the item and reregister the
transaction.

Cancelling of all data registered during the transaction
Press the key to cancel all data registered (except partial tendering) during
the transaction. This operation lets you clear registered data and restart from the beginning.
The cancel operation must be performed before the transaction is finalized.
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
3 PLU0003
1 PLU0004

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0004
6

R-138

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•9.00
•4.00

•4.00
•16.00

1. Wrong registration is made.

REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
3 PLU0003
1

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•9.00

Cancel OK?

PLU0004
6
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
3 PLU0003
1 PLU0004
CANCEL

CANCEL

•4.00
•16.00

2. Press the key.

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•9.00
•4.00
•••••••••••••

0.00
Please sign on.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

3. Press the key to cancel the transaction.

R-139

Registration
4-5.

Using the list function

or No.
↓
PLU 1
← Select one of these.
←
PLU 2
←
PLU 3

Before using the LIST function, the following programs are necessary to use this function.
1) Allocating the key or the key (page 26 of the programming manual)
In case of using the key, key(s) should be allocated on the keyboard
before step 2.
2) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)
3) Programming item price (page 140 of the programming manual)
Normal registration by using the and key
LIST01

0/1-1

PLU001

PLU002

PLU003

PLU004

PLU005

PLU006

PLU007

PLU008

PLU009

PLU010

(List pop-up window)

REG C01
1 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0001
1

1. Press the key or enter the list No. and press the
key. Then the List pop-up window is opened on the
keyboard.

000001
•10.00

•10.00
•10.00

2. Select the appropriate item.

Direct selection by using the key
REG C01
1 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0001
1

R-140

000001
•10.00

•10.00
•10.00

1. Press the appropriate record number and press the
key brings direct selection of the item.

4-6.

Using the set menu function and pulldown group function
4-6-1.

Using the Set Menu function
Before using the set menu function, the following programs are necessary to use this
function.
1) Programming set menu table (page 33 of the programming manual)
2) Programming PLU “Set menu table linking” (page 88 of the programming manual)
3) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 PLU0001
•10.00
PLU0002
PLU0003
Set Menu linked to PLU0001
PLU0004

}

(select “set menu breakdown printing”

PLU0001
1
4-6-2.

•10.00
•10.00

1. Registering a PLU linked to a set menu.

Using the Pulldown group function
PLU (Parent) registration
↓
Child PLU 1 ← Select one of these.
Child PLU 2 ←
Child PLU 3 ←

Before using the pulldown group function, the following programs are necessary to use this
function.
1) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)
2) Programming PLU “List Link No.” (page 88 of the programming manual)
3) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)
REG C01
1 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

REG C01
1 PLU0001
1
PLU0012

000001
•10.00
LIST02

PLU0001

0/1-1

PLU010

PLU011

PLU012

PLU013

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 PLU0001
•10.00
1
PLU0012
•1.00
1
PLU0015

PLU0001
2

000001
•10.00
•1.00
LIST10

•10.00
•10.00
(List pop-up window)

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0001
2

0/1-1

PLU014

PLU015

PLU016

PLU017

•10.00
•11.00
(List pop-up window)

1. Register the parent (main) PLU. The list linked appears.
2. Select the appropriate (child/grandchild) PLU.

•10.00
•11.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-141

Registration
4-6-3.

Using the set menu and pulldown group function
Before using the set menu and pulldown group function, the following programs are
necessary to use this function.
1) Programming set menu table (page 33 of the programming manual)
2) Programming pulldown group (page 32 of the programming manual)
3) Programming PLU “Set menu table linking” and “List Link No.” (page 88 of the
programming manual)
4) Programming item prices (page 140 of the programming manual)

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 PLU0001
•10.00
PLU0002
Set Menu linked to PLU0001
PLU0003
LIST01
PLU0004

}

PLU0001
1

PLU0001
PLU0002, PLU0003, PLU0004

0/1-1

PLU010

PLU011

PLU012

PLU013

(List pop-up window)
•10.00
•10.00

LIST01
↓
PLU0010
PLU0011
PLU0012
PLU0013

← Select one of these.
←
←
←

1.Registering a PLU linked to a set menu and pulldown group.

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 PLU0001
•10.00
PLU0002
Set Menu linked to PLU0001
PLU0003
PLU0004
1
PLU0010 ← Selected in the LIST01

}

PLU0001
2

4-6-4.

2. Select the appropriate item.
If there are more pulldown groups linked to the PLU, next
pulldown group appears on the screen.

•10.00
•11.00

Using the substitution key
Normally, you can select item(s) in a pulldown group. If the customer requires to take an
item from another set menu/pulldown group, the key should be used.
LIST01

REG C01
1 PLU0020
1 PLU0021

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•10.00
•20.00

0/1-1

PLU001

PLU002

PLU003

PLU004

(List pop-up window)

PLU0021
2

R-142

•10.00
•30.00

1. A PLU linked to a pulldown group is registered, but no items
in the list can be selected.

LIST01

REG C01
1 PLU0020
1 PLU0021

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•10.00
•20.00

0/1-1

PLU001

PLU002

PLU003

PLU004

(List pop-up window)

SUBST.
2

0.00
•30.00
2. Press the key.

REG C01
1 PLU0020
1 PLU0021
1 PLU0050

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0050
3
4-6-5.

000001
•10.00
•20.00
•50.00

•50.00
•80.00

3. Register the appropriate item.

Inner multiplication
Normally, the quantity of list linked PLU or set menu child PLU follows the same quantity
as main PLU. But it is possible to register a different number of list linked PLU or child
PLU from the number of main PLU.
Before using the inner multiplication, the following program is necessary in addition to the
Pulldown Group or Set Menu Table to use this function.
Note) Program”Fast food” in the “Set Menu / Condiment” program (page 45 of the
programming manual)
LIST01

REG C01
3 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•30.00
PLU010

PLU011

PLU012

PLU013

(List pop-up window)

PLU0001
3

•30.00
•30.00

1. An multiplication of a PLU is made.
LIST01

REG C01
3 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•30.00

PLU010

PLU011

PLU012

PLU013

(List pop-up window)

X
3

2
•30.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

2. Enter appropriate quantity and press the key.

R-143

Registration
LIST01

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
PLU010
3 PLU0001
•30.00
2
PLU0010
•2.00

PLU011

PLU012

PLU013

(List pop-up window)

PLU0010
5

4-7.

3. Select the appropriate PLU (in case of pulldown group.)

•2.00
•32.00

Post entry

4-7-1.

Post entry is used to suspend the selectable item in the pulldown window of a set menu and
register the selected item. For example, it is used to register dessert which is included in
a set menu. (This function is only effective in check tracking operation.)
To suspend the selection
Dessert

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 Lunch menu
•12.00
Of the day
Soup
Chicken
with pepper
A la carte
Sirloin
Rare
French
Pea

Cheese cake

Beverage

(List pop-up window)

0.00
•12.00

1. Enter the key to suspend the selection.

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 Lunch menu
•12.00
Soup
Chicken
with pepper
Sirloin
Rare
French
Pea
POST ENTRY ← the suspended item

1
4-7-2.

0.00
•12.00

2. The key descriptor shows the suspended item.

To register the suspended item

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 Lunch menu
•12.00
Soup
Chicken
with pepper
Sirloin
Rare
French
Pea
POST ENTRY

R-144

0.00
•12.00

1. Open the check and designate “POST ENTRY” by ?, >.
Pressing the key recalls the pulldown
menu screen to select items.

4-8.

Separate check
Separate check is used to transfer the registered items in the original check to the other
check or pick up the registered items in the original check to finalize them.
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
CHECK No.222222

NEW/OLD

000001

222222

#123456
1

PLU0001

•1.00

PLU0002

•2.00

PLU0003

•3.00

PLU0004

•4.00

PLU0005

•5.00

1. Enter the check number to which the registered items are
transferred and press the key.

PAGE
UP

↑

↓

PAGE
DOWN

•15.00

•0.00
KEYPAD

#123456
1

PLU0001

PLU0003

PLU0005

CANCEL

2. Enter 123456 and press the key. Then the separate check window is opened.

•1.00
PAGE
UP

PLU0002

•2.00

↑

PLU0004

•4.00

•3.00

•5.00
↓

PAGE
DOWN

•9.00

•6.00
KEYPAD

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
CHECK No.222222
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0004
ST

2 ST

CANCEL

3. Select the transferring items in the original
check column (it is transferred to the other
check column). If you want to separate item
line, press key and enter the
quantity you want to separate.

000001
•2.00
•4.00
•6.00

0.00
•6.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

4. After selecting items, press the key in the separate
check window to terminate. The selected items are transferred to other check.

R-145

Registration
4-9.

Open check
To display or print out the opened check report of the signed on operator.

REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000001

0.01

REG
X

C01
0000025

15-12-03 12:34
000001
OPEN CHK
MC #01
15-12-03 12:50
001190
REG C01
CHECK No.1328
•100.35
MC #01
REG C01
15-12-03 12:55
001195
CHECK No.1330
MC #01
REG C01
15-12-03 12:58
001205
CHECK No.1363

1. Enter the record number of the signed on clerk.
2. Press the key.
3. The open check report is issued or displayed (depends on the
program).

0.01

4-9.

Split payment (Dutch account)
This key is used to share the total payment by customer.
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
2 PLU0003
TL
CASH

10-10-01 12:34

SPLIT PAYMENT

000001
•12.00
•15.00
•10.00
•37.00
•37.00

MC #01
REG C01
12-31-2003 12:34 000123
SPLIT PAYMENT
•12.34
TL
•12.34
CASH
•12.34

1. After finalizing a receipt, enter the number of customer
(within 2-digits) and press the key.
2. Issue shared total receipts per customer.

MC #01
REG C01
12-31-2003 12:34 000123
SPLIT PAYMENT
•12.33
TL
•12.33
CASH
•12.33

Receipt for the last customer
Receipt for other customers
Note: The fractions are included in the last customer.

R-146

4-10.

Media change
This key is used to change media in drawer amounts. Pressing this key begins media change
operation.
REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000001

MEDIA CHG
1. First press the key.
REG

C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
MEDIA CHG
•••••••••••••
CASH
-10.00

CASH

REG

2. Enter the in drawer amount to be changed and press the media
key to be changed.

C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
MEDIA CHG
•••••••••••••
CASH
-10.00
CHECK
•2.00

CHECK

REG

-10.00
•10.00

•2.00
•8.00

3. Enter the amount to change and press the media to change,
until the change amount equals to the changed amount.

C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
MEDIA CHG
•••••••••••••
CASH
-10.00
CHECK
•2.00
CREDIT
•8.00

CREDIT

•8.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-147

Registration
4-11.

Eat-in / Takeout
This function is used for specifying if the customer eat in the restaurant or takeout.
1. When the or key is pressed before finalization, tax exemption
will be applied.
After registering one of these keys, it is impossible to register items except void, cancel,
subtotal, finalize and partial payment (including subtotal according to the currency
conversion.) If you want to release the compulsory, press the key.
2. When the or key is pressed, tax status change will be applied.
Be sure to program before using this function.
Example of receipt image
1 Hamburger
1 French fries
1 Coffee
TAKE-OUT

4-12.

•2.00
•1.50
•1.00

Scanning PLU
This function is used for registering PLU items by scanner or OBR code .
Before using this function, you should allocate the scanning PLU file (file no. 16), connect
a scanner and allocate key (function code = 103). Applicable OBR codes are EAN13, EAN-8 and UPC-A.
To register a scanning PLU item
REG C01
1 PLU0100

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0100
1
REG C01
1 PLU0100
1 PLU0101

10-10-01 12:34

PLU0101
2

000001
•1.00

•1.00
•1.00

1. Just scan the item PLU0100.

000001
•1.00
•2.00

•2.00
•3.00

2. Enter the OBR code on the label and press the key.

Not found PLU registration
When you scan an item which is not set in the scanning PLU file, not found error (E028)
occurs. In this case, press key and perform a department registration. After this
procedure, this not found item is registered by department and is set to the scanning PLU
file.
key : function code = 142

R-148

REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

000001

E028 Not found PLU or
C/D is mismatch.

1
REG C01
1 DEPT01

•1.00
•1.00

10-10-01 12:34

DEPT01
2

1. Scan an not found item.

000001
•1.00

•1.00
•2.00

2. Press the key, enter unit price and press the appropriate
department key.

Non PLU
QT-6600 accepts both PLU type and non PLU type barcode. Non PLU type barcode
includes item price/ weight. In case of registering non PLU type barcode, you should
program Non PLU table file before you use (program or register) scanning PLU items.
Refer to 4-4-5 Programming Non PLU table in the programming manual.
Non PLU table file : file no. 976
Scanning PLU maintenance
There are two ways to maintenance scanning PLU file. One is the direct maintenance and
the other is the batch maintenance. By the direct maintenance, you can add or modify
scanning PLU items directly.
By batch maintenance, you can add, modify or delete scanning PLU items to/ from the
scanning PLU file. The procedure to perform batch maintenance, program to the batch
maintenance file first, and execute batch maintenance file.
Refer to 4-4-1 Programming direct maintenance in the programming manual.
Refer to 4-4-2 Programming batch maintenance in the programming manual.
Refer to 3-3-18 Execute batch maintenance file in this manual.
Batch maintenance file : file no. 070
Price change
You can register a scanning PLU item not by the preset price in the scanning PLU file but
a new price. The method to register by a new price is as follows:
1. Enter new price and press the key.
2. Perform scanning PLU registration. (This item should be programmed as an open PLU.)
key : function code = 104
Mix & match
For scanning PLU, refer to 4-21 Scan Mix and match section.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-149

Registration
Add on code
QT-6600 has a capavility to log the supplemental (add-on) barcode data with main
barcode.
The add-on code is logged to the Add on/ VMP file (file-040) with main barcode, shop
code, consecutive number, date, time and item quantity.
The barcode data of the main item should be programmed to the Non PLU table.
Shop code is programmed to the 48-th record of the general control file.
Multi EAN link
If you want to register an item as the item with different barcode data, program the barcode
data of the linked item and the parent item to the multi EAN link file (file no. = 075).
Refer to 4-4-3 Programming multi EAN link of the programming manual.

R-150

4-13.

Shift PLU
This key is used to shift a flat PLU key to the n-th (n = 1 ~ 8) level or a scanning PLU to
the m-th (m = 1 ~ 7).Before using this function, you should allocate the shift PLU file (file055), or scanning PLU shift (2) ~ (7) (file-116 ~ 616), and allocate the key
s(function code = 065), and program the shift level (1 ~ 8) to each key. Since
each shift PLU/ scanning PLU shift file has its own unit prices, counters and totalizers, you
can see the sales quantity / amount of an item by size (S, M, L), quantity etc.
Shift PLU and 2nd @ are incompatible.
Registration example
Flat PLU:
1. Register
level-2 200
REG C01
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0001

10-10-01 12:34

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•3.00

level-3

Scanning PLU:
1. Register
level-2

CASH

•6.00
level-3

4-14.

200

Printing barcode on receipts (UP-400 and UP-360)
This function is used for registering old check by scanning the barcode on the new balance
receipt or issuing guest receipt by scanning the barcode on the finalizing receipt.
(This function is available without allocating scanning PLU file.)
Example of receipt image

1 Hamburger
1 French fries
1 Coffee
NB

2800000012342

$2.00
$1.50
$1.00
$4.50

— Barcode
— Numeric code

Check number (within 4-digits)
After = 28
Flag code:
After Finalization = 29

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-151

Registration
4-15.

Round repeat function
This function is used for repeating registered items of the last receipt finalized by key in check tracking system or clerk interrupt operation.
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
CHECK No.1111
1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
•6.00
SRVC TL

SRVC TL

•6.00

1. To issue the original receipt.
1111

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
CHECK No.1111
1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
---------------------------------------

NEW/OLD
3 ST

1111
•6.00

2. Enter the check number of this receipt and press the key.

REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
CHECK No.1111
1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
--------------------------------------1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
•12.00
SRVC TL

SRVC TL

•12.00
3. Press to recall the last receipt.

R-152

4-16.

Mix & match / coupon
Please note, that the target item of this type of mix & match is PLU, Flat-PLU, Department,
Subdepartment.
Before using the mix & match / coupon function, the following programs are necessary to
use this function.
1) Programming mix & match table (page 63 of the programming manual)
• Discount type (mix & match discount/amount reduction or coupon)
• Minus or discount (%-)
• Discount amount or rate
• Coupon random code (if coupon type is selected)
• Target item (PLU, Flat-PLU, Department, Subdepartment), bundle quantity
2) Allocate coupon number key,if necessaty. (Function code = 110).
Mix and match type
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0003
DISCOUNT01

PLU0003
3 ST

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•3.00
-0.12

•3.00
•5.88

1. Item registration:

(Discount is performed automatically.)

Coupon type
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
1 PLU0011
1 PLU0012
1 PLU0013
DISCOUNT02

3 ST

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•3.00
-0.12

1234
•5.88

QT-6600 Reference Manual

1. Item registration:

<1234> (Discount is performed automatically.)

R-153

Registration
4-17.

Customer
Before using the customer function, the following programs are necessary to use this
function.
1) Allocating customer file (File-037), customer group file (File-042)
Check index file and check detail file are also necessary.
2) Allocating customer ID number key (148), payment key (149), table transfer key (014).
3) Program “Customer Control”, and “Customer Group”, refer to the page 69 of the
programming manual.
4) Program customer No., name, title, address, etc to the customer file, refer to the page 101
of the reference manual.
Item registration
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
DISC
-0.60
•5.40
TBL TRANS

TBL TRANS

1. Enter customer No. and press the (customer ID
No.) key.
2. Perform item registration.
(You can re-enter the customer ID No.)

3. Press the key to finalize the transaction.

Payment (by key)
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
CUST0001
1CT
1 PLU0001
•1.00
1 PLU0002
•2.00
1 PLU0003
•3.00
DISC
-0.60
--------------------------------------•5.40
TL
CASH
•6.00
CG
•0.60

1. Press the key.
2. Enter customer No. and press the (customer ID
No.) key.
3. Perform a finalize operation.

•0.60

Note:
Pressing the directly shows customer No. and name window to specify the
customer. Also you can enter a new customer data here in case of allowing to create a new
customer.

R-154

4-18.

Table sharing
Before using the table sharing function, the following programs are necessary to use this
function.
1) Allocating table sharing key (261).
2) Program to enable table sharing function (refer to the page 46 of the programming
manual.)
1. In case of designating the same table (check) No. which has
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
000001
CHECK No.123456.1
already been occupied, the terminal add the branch No. to the
table No. and open this check as a new check.
(The branch No. (1 ~ 9) is added to prefix to the original table
No.)
1: branch No.
123456: original table (check) No.

NEW CHK

4-19.

123456.1

Order character change
Before using this function, the following programs are necessary.
1) Allocating order character file (File-065).
2) Allocating order character change key (252).
3) Linking order character record No.: if necessary
ORDER CHAR
1.ORDER CHAR01
2.ORDER CHAR02
3.ORDER CHAR03
4.ORDER CHAR04
5.ORDER CHAR05
6.ORDER CHAR06
7.ORDER CHAR07
8.ORDER CHAR08

4-20.

1. By pressing key, the
order character window appears in the screen.
You can select the appropriate order character in the window.
(If the linking order character record No. is set, the order
character is changed to the linking character automatically.)
↓

Item search
Before using this function, the following programs are necessary.
1) Allocating item search key (246).
2) Searching range: By group / subdepartment / department and its record No.

REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

Found Items
1.PLU001
2.PLU002
3.PLU003
4.PLU004
5.PLU005
6.PLU006
7.PLU007
8.PLU008

000001

A1.By pressing key, the character program
keyboard appears on the screen.
A2.You can search the item by entering the item descriptor.
B1. By pressing key, the pulldown group like
window appears on the screen.
B2. You can select the item in the window.

↓

0.00

QT-6600 Reference Manual

C1. By pressing key, the flat-PLU like keyboard appears on the screen.
C2. You can select the item in the keyboard.

R-155

Registration
4-21.

Scan Mix & match
Please note, that the target item of this type of mix & match is scanning PLU.
Before using the scan mix & matchfunction, the following programs are necessary to use
this function.
1) Programming scan mix & match table (page 124 of the programming manual)
• Discount type (mix & match discount, amount reduction type or free item type)
• Minus or discount (%-)
• Discount amount or rate
• Free item barcode (if free item type is selected)
2) Programming scanning PLU
• Scan mix & match link.
Mix and match type
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
1 PLU0001
1 PLU0002
1 PLU0003
DISCOUNT01

PLU0003
3 ST

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•3.00
•0.12

•3.00
•5.88

1. Item registration:

Free item type
REG C01
10-10-01 12:34
1 PLU0011
1 PLU0012
1 PLU0013
Free item

Free item
4 ST

R-156

000001
•1.00
•2.00
•3.00

•0.00
•6.00

1. Item registration:

(Free item is registered automatically.)

4-22.

Time calculation
This function is used for time calculation (such as parking fee). Only PLU has this
capability. You should allocate the additional PLU program file (file-814).
And this function is only effective in the check tracking system.
Time calculation requires the following files:
PLU file
This file is used for registering item.
Unit price of this file is used for the first unit price.
Additional PLU program file
This file is used for time calculation. This file contains,
unit interval time “Interval (minutes)”, second time frame unit price “upper New Interval
Price”, number of unit interval time “upper Change Price After”,
third time frame unit price “lower New Interval Price”, number of unit interval time “lower
Change Price After”
and calculation method “Use Last Interval Price”.
Time calculation
There are two calculation methods.
• In case of setting “No” to “Use Last Interval Price”,
Total fee (case A) = @1 * TA/ Interval time
Total fee (case B) = @1 * TF/ Interval time +@2 * (TB - TF)/ Interval time
Total fee (case C)
= @1 * TF/ Interval time +@2 * TS - TF/ Interval time + @3 * (TC - TS - TF)/ Interval time
• In case of setting “Yes” to “Use Last Interval Price”,
Total fee (case A) = @1 * TA/ Interval time
Total fee (case B) = @2 * TB/ Interval time
Total fee (case C) = @3 * TC/ Interval time
Unit price = @1

Case A

Unit price = @2

Unit price = @3

Out 1

TA
In

Out 2

Case B
TB
Case C

Out 3

TC
TF

Example of receipt image
CHECK No.1
2 PLU0001
12:00 -> 13:50

QT-6600 Reference Manual

•25.00
— Time frame

R-157

Registration
4-23.

Additional PLU character
This function replaces PLU descriptor or adds other descriptor for customer/ employee
convenience.
PLU file
This file is used for registering item.
Additional PLU character file
This file stores additional PLU character. This file contains,
random PLU code or PLU record number,
character to replace or add-on (maximum 10 kinds of add-on),
replace/ add-on selection program, additional character target device.
In case of replacing PLU character:
PLU file character: “Beef Steak”
Additional PLU character: “Bifteck du boeuf”
“Bifteck du boeuf” is printed.
In case of adding on PLU character:
PLU file character: “Beef Steak”
Additional PLU character 1: “Bifteck du boeuf”, character 2: “Rindfleischsteak”
Beef Steak
Bifteck du boeuf
Rindfleischsteak
are printed.

R-158

Refund mode operation ....................................................................... R-158
5-1.

Selecting REF or REG– mode .................................................................... R-158

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-159

Refund Mode
5.

Refund mode operation
The general procedure for entering the REF or REG– mode is as follows.

5-1.

Selecting REF or REG– mode
After sign on operation, press the key and select the or key to
turn that mode.
Refund registration or register minus (REG–) registration starts with this operation.
REG

C01

10-10-01 12:34

REG

000001

Mode

C01

RF C01

10-10-01 12:34

REFUND

000001

Mode

C01

R- C01

10-10-01 12:34

REG-

000001

Mode

C01

Note: Key operations are similar to that in the register mode.
To avoid miss-registration in the REF or REG– mode, return the mode to the former
one immediately.

R-160

Read and reset operations .................................................................. R-160
6-1.
6-2.

The procedures of reading or resetting ....................................................... R-160
Report sample ............................................................................................ R-162

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-161

Read and Reset
6.

Read and reset operations
By setting the mode to the X or Z, the contents of totalizers and counters are enabled to read.
The X mode allows report at any time during business hours. The Z mode is only performed
at the end of the business day, since it clears the data stored to the totalizers and counters.

6-1.

The procedures of reading or resetting
X/Z

C01

15-12-96 12:34

000000

1. Sign on a clerk (if necessary).
2. Press and to assign X/Z report.

X/Z Report
1.Daily
X
2.Periodic(1) X
3.Periodic(2) X
4.Daily
Z
5.Periodic(1) Z
6.Periodic(2) Z
7.Time&Attendance

0.00

3. Select the appropriate menu you want by following the
guidances. The hierarchy of the X/Z menus are described
below.
Refer to page 110 of this manual for X/Z command.

R-162

X/Z Report

Daily X

Batch
Cashier/Clerk
Open Check

E-Journal

Customer Account
Scanning System

Others

Periodic 1 X

Batch
Cashier/Clerk
Customer Account
Others

Periodic 2 X
Daily Z
Periodic 1 Z
Periodic 2 Z
Time & Attendance

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Batch 1 ~ n: n = 1 ~ 10
Individual
All clerk
Individual
Clerk
All
Only total (X only)
All Information (X only)
E-Journal
All
Date & Consecutive number (X only)
Reset only (Z only)
R-Journal
All
Date & Consecutive number (X only)
Customer
(Daily X/Z only)
Customer Group
Scan PLU
All (Daily X/Z only)
Sales Report (Daily X only)
Stock Report (Daily X only)
Reorder Report (Daily X only)
Top 50 Amount (Daily X only)
Top 50 Quantity (Daily X only)
Zero Sales (Daily X only)
Inactive Days Report (Daily X/Z only)
NFP scan PLU (Daily Z only)
Scan Mix & Match (Daily X/Z only)
Individual key
(Daily X/Z only)
Flash
(Daily X only)
Fixed totalizer
Free Function
PLU
PLU stock
(Daily X/Z only)
Sub Department
Department
Group
Hourly sales
Monthly sales
Table analysis
Void
Hourly product
Mix & Match
Simple Time & Attendance (Daily X/Z only)
IDC
IDC (n) clear (Z only): n = 1 ~ 3
Same as Daily X
Same as Daily X
Same as Daily X
Same as Daily X
Same as Periodic 1 X
Same as Daily X
Same as Periodic 1 X
Same as Periodic 2 X
Employee activity
Employee
Employee edit
Hourly Labor

R-163

Read and Reset
6-2.

Report sample
Cashier / clerk report
Z

0001017

CASHIER/CLERK

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

••••••••••••••••••••••••1 —
35
•38.00 —
No
10
•38.00 —
•35.00 —
•3.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
No
10
•35.00 —

C01
GROSS
NET
CAID
CHID
CKID
CRID
CASH

Clerk name / Drawer No.
Gross title / Counter / Totalizer
Net title / totalizer
Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer
Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer
Check in drawer title / Check in drawer
Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer
Cash key title / Counter / Totalizer

— Manager report

--------------------------------------C03
GROSS
NET
CAID
CHID
CKID
CRID
CASH

••••••••••••••••••••••••1
21
•45.00
No
5
•40.00
•35.00
•3.00
•0.00
•0.00
No
10
•35.00

— Cashier report

--------------------------------------C10
GROSS
NET
CAID
CHID
CKID
CRID
CASH

••••••••••••••••••••••••1
10
•18.00
No
8
•18.00
•15.00
•3.00
•0.00
•0.00
No
5
•15.00

— Clerk report

Individual key
Z

— Mode / Report code

0001095

CASH
No
11
•38.00 — Function key descriptor / Counter / Totalizer
CHECK
No
0
•0.00
CREDIT
No
1
•12.00
ADD CHK
No
0
---------------------------------------TL
12
•50.00 — TL descriptor / Counter / Totalizer

Flash
X
NET
CAID
CHID
CKID
CRID

R-164

0000071

— Mode / Report code / Report title

FLASH
No

•38.00 —
•35.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —

Net sales title / Counter /Totalizer
Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer
Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer
Check in drawer title / Check in drawer
Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer

Fixed totalizer
Z

0001011

GROSS
NET
CAID
CHID
CKID
CRID
RF
COVER
TA1
TX1
EX1
TA2
EX9
TA10
TX10
EX10
GT1
GT2
GT3

FIXED TTL

No
CT

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

•38.00 —
•38.00 —
•35.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
2
•8.00 —
2
—
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00
•0.00
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•0.00 —
•1236901437.04 —
•1569567830.40 —
•1325670420.24 —
000001--->001279 —

35
11

Gross sales title / Counter / Totalizer
Net sales title / Counter / Totalizer
Cash in drawer title / Cash in drawer
Charge in drawer title / Charge in drawer
Check in drawer title / Check in drawer
Credit in drawer title / Credit in drawer
Refund mode descriptor / Counter / Totalizer
Customer count descriptor / Counter
Taxable amount 1 descriptor / Taxable amount 1
Tax 1 descriptor / Tax 1 amount
Tax exempt 1 descriptor / Tax exempt amount 1
Taxable amount 10 descriptor / Taxable amount 10
Tax 10 descriptor / Tax 10 amount
Tax exempt 10 descriptor / Tax exempt amount 10
Grand total 1 descriptor / Grand total 1
Grand total 2 descriptor / Grand total 2
Grand total 3 descriptor / Grand total 3
Consecutive No. range

Free function
Z

0001012

CASH
RC
PD

FREE FUNCTION
No
No
No

11
2
1

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)
•38.00 — Transaction key descriptor / Counter / Amount
•8.00
•1.00

PLU
Z

0001014

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU

PLU0001
11.2
DISCOUNT
HOUSE BON QTY
#0001
68.25%
PLU0002
HOUSE BON

50
12
25

•682.55 —
-1.00 —
—
—
•32.00
-5.00

PLU descriptor / Weight * / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
House Bon quantity (always “0” skipped)
PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)
* If weight is “0”, no weight field is printed.

#0100
3.2%
--------------------------------------TL
11.2
75
•714.55
DISCOUNT
-6.00
HOUSE BON QTY
12
71.45%

PLU (with shift PLU)
Z

0001014

PLU0001
DISCOUNT
HOUSE BON QTY
#0001
68.25%
@1
@2
@8
PLU0002
DISCOUNT

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU
50
12
1
2

QT-6600 Reference Manual

•682.55 —
•1.00 —
—
—
•1.23 —
•2.50

PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
House Bon quantity (can be skipped)
PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)
1st unit price descriptor / Counter / Amount

•6.37
•32.00
•5.00

R-165

Read and Reset
PLU (by range)
X

0010074

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU

— PLU range

#0001-#0002
PLU0001
DISCOUNT
HOUSE BON QTY
#0001
68.25%
PLU0002

50
12

•682.55 —
-1.00 —
—
—
25
•32.00
-5.00

PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
House Bon quantity (can be skipped)
PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

DISCOUNT
HOUSE BON QTY
10
#0002
3.2%
---------------------------------------TL
75
•714.55
DISCOUNT
-6.00
HOUSE BON QTY
22
71.45%

PLU (by group / dept / subdept)
X

1000014

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU

GROUP01
•••••••••••••••••01 —
PLU0001
50
•682.55 —
DISCOUNT
-1.00 —
#0001
68.25%
—
PLU0002
25
•32.00
DISCOUNT
-5.00
#0002
3.2%
---------------------------------------TL
75
•714.55 —
DISCOUNT
-6.00
71.45%
GROUP02

PLU0005

Group (dept / subdept) title
PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

Total by group (dept / subdept) / Counter / Amount

•••••••••••••••02

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••00
1
•2.00 — Non Group (dept / subdept) link items

DISCOUNT
•0.00
#0005
0.2%
--------------------------------------TL
1
•2.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00
0.2%

PLU (by order character)
X

4000014

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU

ORDER01
•••••••••••••••••01 —
PLU0001
50
•682.55 —
DISCOUNT
-1.00 —
#0001
68.25%
—
PLU0002
25
•32.00
DISCOUNT
-5.00
#0002
3.2%
---------------------------------------TL
75
•714.55 —
DISCOUNT
-6.00
71.45%
ORDER02

Order title
PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
PLU No. (can be skipped) / Sales ratio (can be skipped)

Total by order / Counter / Amount

•••••••••••••••••02

PLU0005
1
•2.00 — Non order character link item
DISCOUNT
•0.00
#0005
0.2%
---------------------------------------TL
1
•2.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00
0.2%

R-166

PLU zero sales
X

0100014

— Mode / Report code / Report title

PLU

PLU0001
DISCOUNT
#0001
PLU0002

•0.00 — PLU descriptor / Weight / Counter / Amount
•0.00
— PLU No. (can be skipped)
•0.00

--------------------------------------TL
0
•0.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00

PLU zero sales (by group / dept / subdept / order)
X
1100014
GROUP01
PLU0001
DISCOUNT
#0001
PLU0002

PLU

—
••••••••••••••••01 —
0
•0.00 —
•0.00
—
0
•0.00

Mode / Report code / Report title
Group (dept / subdept / order character) title
PLU descriptor / Counter / Amount
PLU No. (can be skipped)

GROUP02
••••••••••••••••02
---------------------------------------TL
0
•0.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00
---------------------------------------TL
0
•0.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00

PLU stock / PLU less stock
X

0000064

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU STOCK

PLU0001
#0001
PLU0002
#0002

10
25

123.45
*

— PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock
— PLU No. (can be skipped)
— * short stock

PLU stock (by range)
X

0010064

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU STOCK

— Range

#0001-#0002
PLU0001
#0001
PLU0002
#0002

10
25

123.45
*

— PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock
— PLU No. (can be skipped)
— * short stock

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-167

Read and Reset
PLU stock (by group / dept / subdept / order)
X

1000064

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

PLU STOCK

•••••••••••••••••01 —
10
123.45
—
—
25
*
20
—

GROUP01
PLU0001
#0001
PLU0002
#0002

Link group (dept / subdept / order) title
PLU descriptor / Minimum stock level / Current stock
PLU No. (can be skipped)
* short stock

Subdepartment (all)
Z

0001013

SUB DEPT

SUBDEPT01
DISCOUNT

24
70.82%

SUBDEPT02
DISCOUNT

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)
•82.55 — Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount
-1.00 — Discount total (can be skipped)
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•32.00
-2.00

27.45%

---------------------------------------TL
151
•156.55
DISCOUNT
-3.00
100.00%

Subdepartment (by range)
X

0010013

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

SUB DEPT

— Range

#0001-#0002
SUBDEPT01
DISCOUNT

24
70.82%

SUBDEPT02
DISCOUNT

•82.55 — Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount
-1.00 — Discount total (can be skipped)
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•32.00
-2.00

27.45%
---------------------------------------TL
49
•114.55
DISCOUNT
-3.00
98.27%

Subdepartment (by group / dept)
X

100013

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

SUB DEPT

•••••••••••••••••01 —
24
•82.55 —
•1.00 —
70.82%
—
SUBDEPT02
25
•32.00
DISCOUNT
•2.00
27.45%
---------------------------------------TL
49
•114.55
DISCOUNT
•3.00
98.27%
GROUP01
SUBDEPT01
DISCOUNT

SUBDEPT04
DISCOUNT

•1.00 — No group link items
•0.00

0.87%
---------------------------------------TL
1
•1.00
DISCOUNT
•0.00
0.87%

R-168

Group title
Subdepartment descriptor / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
Sales ratio (can be skipped)

Department (all)
X

0000015

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

DEPT

DEPT01
DISCOUNT

24
70.82%

DEPT02
DISCOUNT

•82.55 — Department descriptor / Counter / Amount
-1.00 — Discount total (can be skipped)
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•32.00
-2.00

27.45%

---------------------------------------TL
151
•156.55
DISCOUNT
-3.00
100.00%

Department (by range)
X

0010015

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

DEPT

— Range

#0001-#0002
DEPT01
DISCOUNT

24
70.82%

DEPT02
DISCOUNT

•82.55 — Department descriptor / Counter / Amount
-1.00 — Discount total (can be skipped)
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•32.00
-2.00

27.45%
---------------------------------------TL
49
•114.55
DISCOUNT
-3.00
98.27%

Department (by group)
X

1000015

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

DEPT

•••••••••••••••••01 —
24
•82.55 —
-1.00 —
70.82%
—
DEPT02
25
•32.00
DISCOUNT
-2.00
27.45%
---------------------------------------TL
49
•114.55
DISCOUNT
-3.00
98.27%
GROUP01
DEPT01
DISCOUNT

DEPT04
DISCOUNT

Group title
Department descriptor / Counter / Amount
Discount total (can be skipped)
Sales ratio (can be skipped)

•1.00 — No group link items
-0.00

0.87%
---------------------------------------TL
1
•1.00
DISCOUNT
-0.00
0.87%

Department (stock)
X

0000015

DEPT

— Mode / Report code / Report title

DEPT01
6
•163.54 — Department descriptor / Counter / Amount
Stock
-10
— Stock title / Actual stock
DEPT02
2
•2.55
Stock
-12.234
---------------------------------------TL
8
•166.09
In case of the discount field treats as stock field.
Stock
-22.234

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-169

Read and Reset
Group
X

0000016

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

GROUP

GROUP01

6
1.63%

GROUP02

•163.54 — Group descriptor / Counter / Amount
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•2.55

2
0.02%
---------------------------------------TL
8
•166.09
1.65%

Hourly sales
Z

0001019

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

HOURLY

09:00->10:00
1.63%

1
1

10:00->11:00
3.52%
CT

•63.54 — Time frame / Net counter / Net amount
•63.54 — Sales ratio (can be skipped) / Customer counter / MDST amount

•122.55

Monthly sales
Z

0001020

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

MONTHLY

7 ......
—
GROSS
52
•680.57 —
NET
No
12
•680.50 —
8 ......
GROSS
78
•1,034.59
NET
No
37
•1,034.57
---------------------------------------TL
GROSS
130
•1,715.16
•13.19 —
NET
49
•1,715.07
•35.00 —

Day of the month
Gross counter / Gross amount
Net counter / Net amount

Average gross sales
Average net sales

Table analysis
Z

0001028

TBL0001
AVRG
TBL0002
AVRG

TABLE ANALYSIS
CT
50.12%
CT

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)
•680.57 — Table No. / Customer count / Net amount
•56.71 — Average sales per customer
— Sales ratio (can be skipped)
•279.56
•55.91

10.04%
---------------------------------------TL
CT
28
•1,267.97
AVRG
•45.28
60.16%

Void reason
Z

0001022

OPE ERR
OUT OF DATE

R-170

VOID REASON
No
No
No

12
10
0

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)
•80.50 — Void reason / Counter / Amount
•40.42
•0.00

Open check
X

0050025

— Mode / Report code / Report title

OPEN CHK

MC #01
—
REG C01
07-01-2005 12:34
001029 —
CHECK No.001245
12CT
#000121 —
•100.35 —
MC #02
REG C04
07-01-2005 14:31
001186
CHECK No.001328
2CT
#000226
BUSY
•130.45 —
MC #01
REG C04
07-01-2005 14:35
001686
CHECK NO.002222
2CT
#000226
FINALIZED
•1.00 —
MC #01
REG C04
07-01-2005 14:45
001886
1CT
#000326
CHECK No.1
CUSTOMER
MR.DEAL,GLEN
—
•1.00 —

Machine No.
Mode / Clerk / Date / Time / Consecutive No.
Check No. / Cover No. / Table No.
Subtotal amount (temporary closed by NB)

Busy status

Finalized status

Customer descriptor / entered customer name
Dummy check

CHECK No.003333
NEW OPEN
•0.00 — Newly opened status
---------------------------------------TL
No
4
•360.80

Electronic journal (E-journal)
Z

0001058

REG C01
1 PLU0055
0.12%
%TL
CASH
P1 C01
X/Z
X

C01
0100015

— Mode / Report code / Report title

JOURNAL
MC #03
07-11-2005 16:34
001029
•100.00

-0.12
— Registrations
•99.88
•99.88
MC #03
07-11-2005 16:35
001030 — Some program are made in Program 1 mode.
MC #03
07-11-2005 16:37
001031
DEPT
— Report issued

Electronic journal (R-journal)
Z

0001060

— Mode / Report code / Report title

JOURNAL

(Same format as E-Journal)

Employee activity
X

0000029

#000001
#000002
#000003
#000004

— Mode / Report title / Report code

EMPLOYEE

HARRISON
BAKER
PEABODY
JOHNSON

1111111111 — Employee No. / Employee character / Social Security No.
2222222222
3333333333
4444444444

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-171

Read and Reset
Employee report (daily)
X

000029

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

EMPLOYEE

123456789 — Employee No. / Employee character / Social Security No.

#123456 HARRISON

Monday
12-20-03 — Day of the week / Date
IN
OUT
BRK
JOB#
TIP
WORK
08:00-10:00 00:15 12 •12.34
01:45 — Shift 1: Clock-in / Clock-out / Break / Job code / Tip / Work time
12:00-**:** 00:10 01
•0.00
**:** — Shift 2: Clock-out shift *1
**:**-**:**
— Shift 3: Clock-in shift *2
---------------------------------------TL
00:25
•12.34
**:** — Break total / Tip total / Work time total *3
JOB# 12
01:45
JOB# 1
**:**
REGULAR TIME
OVER TIME
TL

— Job summary / Job code / Work time *4
— Job summary *5
— Regular work hours *6
— Overtime work hours *6
•5.45 — Total of work hours *6 / Pay

00:45
00:17
01:12

*1
*2
*3
*4

If employee is not clocked-out the shift, then “**:**” is printed on OUT & WORK.
If employee is not clocked-in the shift, then “**:**-**:**” is printed on IN&OUT.
If employee is not clocked-out the shift yet, then “**:**” is printed on WORK.
JOB summary is printed in order to clock-in the shift.
If there is the same JOB code, then it will add to the JOB that was found before.
*5 If employee is not clocked-out the shift, then “**:**” is printed. No JOB # is printed, if
employee is not clocked-in the shift.
*6 You can select HH:MM format or HH.mm (print minutes in fraction) format.

Employee report (weekly / bi-weekly)
X

000129

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

EMPLOYEE

#123456 HARRISON

123456789

Monday
12-21-03 — Day of the week / Date
IN
OUT
BRK
JOB#
TIP
WORK
08:00-10:00 00:10 12
•12.34
01:45— Shift 1
12:00-15:00 00:10 01
•0.00
02:50— Shift 2
**:**-**:**
— Shift 3
---------------------------------------TL
00:25
•12.34
04:35
Tuesday
12-22-03
IN
OUT
BRK
JOB#
TIP
WORK
08:00-10:00 00:10 12
•12.34
01:45
12:00-15:00 00:10 01
•0.00
02:50
**:**-**:**
---------------------------------------TL
00:25
•12.34
04:35
Sunday
IN
OUT

BRK

JOB#

TIP

WORK

---------------------------------------TL
00:00
•0.00
00:00
JOB# 12
01:45
JOB# 01
02:00
JOB# 05
02:00
JOB# 10
02:08
REGULAR TIME
OVER TIME
TL

— Job summary

00:45
00:17
01:55

— Regular work hours
— Overtime work hours
•2.04 — Total of work hours/ Pay

*1 If all shift in one day of the week is zero (no data), then that day of the week is not printed on
the report.

R-172

Hourly item
Z

0001031

1234 —Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

HOURLY PRODUCT

09:00->09:30
— Time frame
GROSS
1357.956
•2,469.06 — Totalizer character / Counter / Amount
40%
NET
No
12
•2,469.06
40%
— Sales ratio (Amount / Total amount of each time frame) (can be skipped)
PLU0001
1234.5
•1,234.50
20%
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
9.89%
•6,172.62 — Sales ratio (Amount /Total amount of all time frame)/Total
Amount of this time frame
09:30->10:00
GROSS
1357.956
•2,469.06
40%
NET
No
12
•2,469.06
40%
PLU0001
1234.5
•1,234.50
20%
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

19:30->20:00
GROSS
1357.956
•2,469.06
40%
NET
No
12
•2,469.06
40%
PLU0001
1234.5
•1,234.50
20%
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
9.89%
•6,172.62
•62,395.07 — Total Amount of all Time frame

Hourly labor report
Z

0001024

1234 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

HOURLY LABOR

09:00->09:30
No
82.62%
COST
0%
NET SALES/HOUR
COST/TRANSACTION

2
00:05

09:30->10:00

16:00->16:45

•2,469.06 — Time frame / NET counter / NET Amount
— NET ratio (can be skipped)
•0.08 — Work time / Pay
— Pay ratio
•29,628.72 — Proceeds per work time
•0.04 — Wages per transaction

•0.00
0%
COST
0%
NET SALES/HOUR
COST/TRANSACTION

00:01

•0.00
•0.00
•0.00

IDC clear
Z

0001067 IDC(1) Clear
Normal End

1 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)
— Result print

Customer group
X

0000052

CUST GP01
CUST GP02

CUSTOMER GP
No
No

1
0

QT-6600 Reference Manual

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter
•12.34 — Customer group 01 descriptor / Counter / Totalizer
•0.00

R-173

Read and Reset
Customer open check (individual)
X

0020047

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUSTOMER

CUST No.111111
Mr.
John SMITH
BALANCE
DISCOUNT
FINALIZED GT
DISCOUNT GT

*—
—
—
•10.23 —
•1.23 —
•316.36 —
•41.23 —
—
—
—
—
—

1-2-3 Hon-machi
Shibuya-ku
Tokyo JAPAN
ZIP-123-4567
PHONE No.012345678

Customer number / * New customer
Customer title (Skip if nothing is set.)
Customer’s name
Customer’s balance
Discount total
Finalized grand total
Discount grand total
Address (1) (Skip if nothing is set.)
Address (2) (Skip if nothing is set.)
Address (3) (Skip if nothing is set.)
Address (4) (Skip if nothing is set.)
Telephone No. (Skip if nothing is set.)

Customer open check (all)
X

0000047

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUSTOMER

CUST No.000001
*—
Mr.
—
Joseph McAfee
—
BALANCE
•10.23 —
DISCOUNT
•1.23 —
FINALIZED GT
•316.36 —
DISCOUNT GT
•41.23 —
-------------------------------------BUSY
—
CUST No.000022
BALANCE
•110.23
DISCOUNT
•1.23
FINALIZED GT
•616.36
DISCOUNT GT
•41.23
-------------------------------------—
TL
No
2
BALANCE
•120.46 —
DISCOUNT
•2.46 —

Customer number / * New customer
Customer title (Skip if nothing is set.)
Customer’s name
Customer’s balance
Discount total
Finalized grand total
Discount grand total
Busy (Occupied) flag

No. of customer
Customer balance total
Customer discount total

Customer open check (total only)
X

0040047

TL
BALANCE
DISCOUNT

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUSTOMER
No

— No. of customer
•120.46 — Customer balance total
•2.46 — Customer discount total

Customer open check (all information)
X

0050047

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

CUSTOMER

CUST No.000001
Mr.
Joseph McAfee
BALANCE
DISCOUNT
FINALIZED GT
DISCOUNT GT

*—
—
—
•10.23 —
•1.23 —
•316.36 —
•41.23 —

1-2-3 Hon-machi
Shibuya-ku
Tokyo JAPAN
ZIP-123-4567
PHONE No.012345678
-------------------------------------BUSY
CUST No.000022

—
—
—
—
—

— Busy (Occupied) flag

PHONE No.012345678
-------------------------------------TL
No
2
— No. of customer
BALANCE
•120.46 — Customer balance total
DISCOUNT
•2.46 — Customer discount total

R-174

Mix and match
X

0000061

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

MIX&MATCH

Bundle A
No
2
•10.46 — Discount total
#01234
— Coupon No.
Bundle B
No
23
•120.46
#0111
--------------------------------------TL
No
25
•130.92

Scan Mix and match
X

0001066

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

MIX&MATCH

DISCOUNT
No
2
•10.46 — Discount total
FREE ORDER
No
23
•120.46
--------------------------------------TL
No
25
•130.92

Simple time and attendance
X

0001023

— Mode / Report code / Report title / Z counter (Z only)

TIME ATTENDANCE

EMPLOYEE NO.

— Emplyee number

000123

15.01-15.01 11:59-14:29 END OF SHIFT — Day, Time (Clock-in to clock-out) / Clock-out reason
15.02-15.02 18:00-20:05 UNWEL
--------------------------------------WHOLE TIME
04:35
EMPLOYEE NO.
000999
--------------------------------------WHOLE TIME
00:00

Scanning PLU (with shift file)
Z

0001026

#49177008
ERASER

123 — Mode / Report code / Report title / Z No. (Z only)

SCANNING PLU

•1.00

#4901351036723
CANDY
123.012
2nd Price
12
:
7th Price
1
DISCOUNT

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount

•123.45
•12.00

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount
— 2nd price decriptor / Counter / Amount

•5.00
-2.50

— 7th price decriptor / Counter / Amount
— Discount amount

:
NFP Scan PLU

— NFP title (In case of registering Not found PLU)

C01
#4902102037549
DEPT01
2
DISCOUNT

— Clerk who register NFP
— OBR code
— Link department decriptor / Counter / Amount

•2.00
-0.20

:
--------------------------------------TL
1234.563
•130.92
—
DISCOUNT
-10.98
—
@1
22
•20.93
—
@2
:
@7
•19.29
TOTAL ITEMS:
0001234/ 100000 —

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Total (counter / totalizer)
Total (discount)
Total (counter / totalizer for 1st shift item)

Items / Allocated records

R-175

Read and Reset
Scanning PLU sales (by group / department / subdepartment)
X
0010026
#0001-0010

— Mode / Report code / Report title
— Range (group / department / subdepartment)

SALES REPORT

— Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

DEPT01
#4911177008
ERASER

•1.00

#4901351036723
CANDY
123.012
•123.45
DISCOUNT
-2.50
--------------------------------------TL
1234.563
•130.92
DISCOUNT
-10.98
@1
22
•20.93
@2
:
@7
•19.29

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount
— OBR code (for 2nd shift)
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount
— Discount amount
— Department 1 total (counter / totalizer)
— Total (discount)
— Total (counter / totalizer for 1st shift item)

DEPT02
#4902102037549
OOLONG TEA
5
•5.00
DISCOUNT
-1.00
--------------------------------------TL
34
•13.92
— Department 2 total
DISCOUNT
-1.00
@1
2
•2.93
@2
:
@7
•1.40
:
--------------------------------------— Total
TL
34
•13.92
DISCOUNT
-1.00
@1
2
•2.93
@2
:
@7
•1.40
TOTAL ITEMS:
0001234/ 100000 — Items / Allocated records

Scanning PLU stock (by group / department / subdepartment)
X
0020026
#0001-0010

— Mode / Report code / Report title
— Range (group / department / subdepartment)

STOCK REPORT

— Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

DEPT01
#4911177008
ERASER
#4901351036723
CANDY

100

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Actual stock

-3.452

— OBR code (for 2nd shift)
— Item decriptor / Actual stock

DEPT02
#4902102037549
OOLONG TEA

Scanning PLU out of stock (by group / department / subdepartment)
X
0030026
#0001-0010

— Mode / Report code / Report title
— Range (group / department / subdepartment)

REORDER REPORT

— Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

DEPT01
#4911177008
ERASER
#4901351036723
CANDY

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Actual stock

-3.452

— OBR code (for 2nd shift)
— Item decriptor / Actual stock

DEPT02
#4902102037549
OOLONG TEA

R-176

Print items, if the stock value is less than or equal to the actual stock level which is entered before
issuing this report.

Scanning PLU Top 50 amount
X

0040026

#4901351036723
CANDY
123.012
DISCOUNT
#4911177008
ERASER

— Mode / Report code / Report title

TOP 50 AMOUNT

•123.45
-2.50

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount
— Discount amount

•1.00

:
--------------------------------------TL
1234.563
•130.92
— Total
DISCOUNT
-10.98
@1
22
•20.93
@2
:
@7
•19.29

Scanning PLU Top 50 quantity
X

0050026

#4901351036723
CANDY
123.012
DISCOUNT
#4911177008
ERASER

— Mode / Report code / Report title

TOP 50 QUANTITY

•123.45
-2.50

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Counter / Amount
— Discount amount

•1.00

:
--------------------------------------TL
1234.563
•130.92
— Total
DISCOUNT
-10.98
@1
22
•20.93
@2
:
@7
•19.29

Scanning PLU zero sales (by group / department / subdepartment)
X
0060026
#0001-0010

ZERO SALES

— Mode / Report code / Report title
— Range (group / department / subdepartment)
— Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

DEPT01
#4911177008
ERASER

28-02-2008

#4901351036723
CANDY

01-03-2008

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Last update date

DEPT02
#4902102037549
OOLONG TEA

12-03-2008

Scanning PLU inactive (by group / department / subdepartment)
X
0070026
#0001-0010

INACTIVE DAYS REPORT

— Mode / Report code / Report title
— Range (group / department / subdepartment)
— Group / department / subdepartment descriptor

DEPT01
#4911177008
ERASER

28-02-2008

#4901351036723
CANDY

01-03-2008

— OBR code
— Item decriptor / Last update date

DEPT02
#4902102037549
OOLONG TEA

12-03-2008

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-177

Read and Reset
Not found PLU
X

0010027

— Mode / Report code / Report title

NOT FOUND PLU

— Clerk

C01
#4911177008
DEPT01
DISCOUNT

•5.00
-1.98

— OBR code
— Link department decriptor / Counter / Amount
— Discount total
— Barcode

4911177008
#4901351036723
DEPT01
5
DISCOUNT

4901351036723

R-178

•10.00
-1.77

A-1. Function key list .................................................................................. R-178

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-179

Function key list
A-1. Function key list
Function
Add check
Arrangement
Bill copy
Break-in / out
Cancel
Cash amount tendered
Charge
Check endorsement
Check print
Check tender
Clerk number
Clerk transfer
Clock-in / out
Coupon
Coupon 2
Coupon number
Credit
Cube
Currency exchange
Customer number
Declaration
Department
Department number
Deposit
Discount
Display mode
Eat-in
EBT tender
Electronic journal display
Error correct / Void
First unit price
Flat PLU
Food stamp status shift
Food stamp subtotal
Food stamp tender
Function list
House Bon
Item search
Ketten Bon
List
List number
Loan
Location change
Lock out unused key
Media change
Menu shift
Merchandise subtotal
Minus
Multiplication
New balance
New check
New / Old check
NLU (number look up)
Normal receipt
No sale
Non-add
Non-add / No sale
Not found PLU
Number of customer
OBR
Old check
Open
Open2
Open check
Operator number
Operator read / reset
Order character change
Paid out

R-180

Code
094
044
047
109
236
001
002
039
012
003
072
013
108
023
036
110
004
090
045
148
061
051
135
025
028
219
128
007
207
034
069
063
059
081
005
253
114
246
113
136
137
019
260
000
118
064
080
027
082
006
091
093
138
016
042
040
041
142
043
103
092
067
068
117
078
073
252
021

Initial character
ADD CHK
ARG
BILL
BREAK-IN/OUT
CANCEL
CASH
CHARGE
CK.E
CHKP
CHECK
CLK#
CLK TRANS
CLOCK-IN/OUT
COUPON
CPN2
COUPON#
CREDIT
XXX
CE
CUST#
DECLA
DEPT nn
DEPT#
DEPOSIT
%–
DISP MODE
EAT-IN
EBTTD
EJ DISP
VOID
1st@
PLU nnn
F/S
FSST
FSTD
FUNCLIST
HOUSE BON
SEARCH
X/KETTEN
LIST
LIST#
LOAN
LOCATION
NOP
MEDIA CHG
MENU
MDST
–
X
NB
NEW CHK
NEW/OLD
NLU
NRMRCT
NS
#
#/NS
NFP
CT
OBR
OLD CHK
OPEN
OPEN2
OPEN CHK
OPE#
OPE X/Z
ORDER CHAR
PD

Function
Payment
Pick up
Plus
PLU
Post entry
Premium
Price
Price change
Price inquiry
Quantity / for
Recall
Receipt
Receipt on / off
Received on account
Refund
Room number
Room message
Round repeat
Scale
Seat number
Second unit price
Selective item subtotal
Separate check
Shift PLU
Slip back feed / release
Slip feed / release
Slip print
Split payment
Square
Stock inquiry
Store
Subdepartment
Subdepartment number
Substitution
Subtotal
Swipe
Table number
Table sharing
Table transfer
Takeout
Tare
Tax status shift
Taxable amount subtotal
Tax exempt
Text print
Text recall
Tray total
Tip
Validation
VAT
Worktime
System keys
Numeric key
Clear
Decimal point
Escape / Skip
Home position
Page down
Page up
Mode
Two zero
Yes
No
Left arrow
Right arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
End

Code
149
022
029
048
115
030
049
104
008
083
131
038
076
020
033
100
101
116
088
119
070
085
095
065
054
056
055
140
084
009
130
133
134
111
075
172
058
261
014
129
087
057
077
062
011
010
074
015
037
046
237

Initial character
PAYMENT
P.UP
+
PLU#
POST ENTRY
%+
PRC
PRICE CHANGE
PRCINQ
QT
RECALL
RCT
RCT ON/OFF
RC
RF
ROOM#
ROOM MSG
ROUND REPEAT
SCALE
SEAT#
2nd@
SIST
SEP CHK
SFT PLU
SB/R
SF/R
SLIP
SPLIT PAYMENT
XX
STKINQ
STORE
SUBDEPT nn
SDPT#
SUBST.
SUBTOTAL
SWIPE
TBL#
TBL SHARE
TBL TRANS
TAKE-OUT
TARE
T/S
TAST
EXEMPT
PRT
CHAR
TRAY TTL
TIP
VLD
VAT
WORKTIME

000n201
202
098
211
218
220
221
124
096
212
213
214
215
216
217
222

n=1~9, “0”=10
.
HOME
PAGE DOWN
PAGE UP
MODE
00

A-2.
A-2-1.
A-2-1-1
A-2-1-2

A-2-2.
A-2-2-1
A-2-2-2

A-2-3.
A-2-3-1
A-2-3-2

A-2-4.
A-2-4-1
A-2-4-2
A-2-4-3
A-2-4-4
A-2-4-5

A-2-5.
A-2-5-1
A-2-5-2
A-2-5-3
A-2-5-4
A-2-5-5
A-2-5-6
A-2-5-7
A-2-5-8

A-2-6.
A-2-6-1
A-2-6-2

A-2-7.
A-2-7-1
A-2-7-2

A-2-8.
A-2-8-1
A-2-8-2
A-2-8-3
A-2-8-4

A-2-9.
A-2-9-1

A-2-10.
A-2-10-1

A-2-11.
A-2-11-1
A-2-11-2

A-2-12.
A-2-12-1
A-2-12-2

A-2-13.
A-2-13-1

File format .................................................................................. R-183
Fixed totalizer file ...................................................................... R-183
Fixed totalizer (daily) ................................................................................ R-183
Fixed totalizer (periodic/consolidation) ..................................................... R-183

Transaction key file ................................................................... R-184
Transaction key (daily) .............................................................................. R-184
Transaction key (periodic/consolidation)................................................... R-184

Subdepartment file ................................................................... R-184
Subdepartment (daily) .............................................................................. R-184
Subdepartment (periodic/consolidation) ................................................... R-184

PLU file ....................................................................................... R-185
PLU (daily) ................................................................................................ R-185
PLU (periodic/consolidation) .................................................................... R-185
PLU 2nd@ ................................................................................................ R-185
Shift PLU (daily) ....................................................................................... R-186
Shift PLU (periodic/consolidation) ............................................................ R-186

Scanning PLU file ..................................................................... R-187
Scanning PLU .......................................................................................... R-187
Scanning PLU shift ................................................................................... R-187
Scan Mix & match (daily) .......................................................................... R-187
Scan Mix & match (periodic/consolidation) .............................................. R-187
Batch maintenance ................................................................................... R-188
Multi EAN link ........................................................................................... R-188
Non PLU table .......................................................................................... R-188
NLU table ................................................................................................. R-188

Department file .......................................................................... R-189
Department (daily) .................................................................................... R-189
Department (periodic/consolidation) ........................................................ R-189

Group file ................................................................................... R-190
Group (daily) ............................................................................................. R-190
Group (periodic/consolidation) ................................................................. R-190

Clerk file ..................................................................................... R-191
Clerk (programming) ................................................................................ R-191
Clerk detail (daily, periodic / consolidation) .............................................. R-192
Clerk detail link ......................................................................................... R-192
Clerk (i-Button) key ID .............................................................................. R-192

Hourly sales file ........................................................................ R-193
Hourly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation) .............................................. R-193

Monthly sales file ...................................................................... R-193
Monthly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation) ............................................ R-193

Hourly item file .......................................................................... R-194
Hourly item ............................................................................................... R-194
Hourly item link (Hourly production link) ................................................... R-194

Mix and match file ..................................................................... R-195
Mix and match (daily) ............................................................................... R-195
Mix and match (periodic/consolidation) .................................................... R-195

IDC file ........................................................................................ R-196
IDC file (1) ................................................................................................ R-196

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-181

File Format
A-2-13-2
A-2-13-3
A-2-13-4

A-2-14.
A-2-14-1
A-2-14-2.
A-2-14-3.
A-2-14-4.
A-2-14-5.
A-2-14-6.
A-2-14-7.
A-2-14-8.

A-2-15.
A-2-15-1
A-2-15-2

A-2-16.
A-2-16-1
A-2-16-2

A-2-17.
A-2-17-1
A-2-17-2

A-2-18.
A-2-18-1
A-2-18-2
A-2-18-3
A-2-18-3

A-2-19.
A-2-19-1

A-2-20.
A-2-20-1

A-2-21.
A-2-20-1

A-2-22.
A-2-19-1

A-2-23.
A-2-23-1

A-2-24.
A-2-24-1

A-2-25.
A-2-25-1

A-2-26.
A-2-26-1

A-2-27.
A-2-27-1

A-2-28.
A-2-28-1

A-2-29.
A-2-29-1
R-182

IDC file (2) ................................................................................................ R-196
IDC file (3) ................................................................................................ R-196
IDC link ..................................................................................................... R-196

Time & Attendance file ............................................................. R-197
Hourly / Labor ........................................................................................... R-197
Work time file ............................................................................................ R-197
Time zone file ........................................................................................... R-198
Employee file ............................................................................................ R-198
Job code file ............................................................................................. R-198
Schedule file ............................................................................................. R-199
Simple time and attendance file ............................................................... R-199
Clock-out reason file ................................................................................. R-199

Void table file ............................................................................. R-200
Void table (daily) ....................................................................................... R-200
Void table (periodic/consolidation) ............................................................ R-200

Table analysis file ...................................................................... R-200
Table analysis (daily) ................................................................................ R-200
Table analysis (periodic/consolidation) ..................................................... R-200

Grand total file ........................................................................... R-201
Grand total (daily) ..................................................................................... R-201
Grand total (periodic/consolidation) .......................................................... R-201

Customer file ............................................................................. R-202
Customer file ............................................................................................ R-202
Customer group file (daily) ....................................................................... R-202
Customer group (periodic/consolidation).................................................. R-202
Customer title ........................................................................................... R-202

General control file ................................................................... R-203
General control ......................................................................................... R-203

Special character file ................................................................ R-204
Special character ...................................................................................... R-204

Report header file ..................................................................... R-204
Report header .......................................................................................... R-204

Tax table file............................................................................... R-204
Tax table ................................................................................................... R-204

Pulldown group file ................................................................... R-205
Pulldown group ......................................................................................... R-205

Set menu table file .................................................................... R-205
Set menu table ......................................................................................... R-205

Batch X/Z file ............................................................................. R-206
Batch X/Z .................................................................................................. R-206

Receipt / Slip message file ....................................................... R-206
Receipt / Slip message ............................................................................. R-206

Check endorsement message file ........................................... R-206
Check endorsement message .................................................................. R-206

Arrangement file ....................................................................... R-207
Arrangement group (1) ~ (5)..................................................................... R-207

Character recall file ................................................................... R-207
Character recall ........................................................................................ R-207

A-2-30.
A-2-30-1

A-2-31.
A-2-31-1

A-2-32.
A-2-32-1

A-2-33.
A-2-33-1

A-2-34.
A-2-34-1

A-2-35.
A-2-35-1

A-2-36.
A-2-36-1

A-2-37.
A-2-37-1

A-2-38.
A-2-38-1

A-2-39.
A-2-39-1

A-2-40.
A-2-40-1

A-2-41.
A-2-41-1

A-2-42.
A-2-42-1

A-2-43.
A-2-43-1

A-2-45.
A-2-45-1

A-2-46.
A-2-46-1

A-2-44.
A-2-44-1

A-2-48.
A-2-48-1

A-2-47.
A-2-47-1

A-2-49.
A-2-49-1
A-2-49-2
A-2-49-3
A-2-49-4
A-2-49-5
A-2-49-6
A-2-49-7
A-2-49-8

Check print file .......................................................................... R-207
Check print ............................................................................................... R-207

Graphic logo file........................................................................ R-207
Graphic logo (external printer) .................................................................. R-207

Scheduler file ............................................................................ R-208
Scheduler ................................................................................................. R-208

Order character file ................................................................... R-208
Order character ........................................................................................ R-208

Euro program file ...................................................................... R-208
Euro program file ...................................................................................... R-208

Character conversion for CF file.............................................. R-208
Character conversion for CF file ............................................................... R-208

Check# pop-up window definition file..................................... R-209
Check# pop-up window definition file ....................................................... R-209

Clerk pop-up window definition file ........................................ R-209
Clerk pop-up window definition file ........................................................... R-209

Sound file ................................................................................... R-209
Sound (1) ~ (10) file.................................................................................. R-209

Add on VMP file ......................................................................... R-210
Add on VMP file ........................................................................................ R-210

Intelligent EJ file ....................................................................... R-210
Intelligent EJ file ....................................................................................... R-210

Menu title character file ............................................................ R-210
Menu title character file ............................................................................ R-210

Tare table file ............................................................................. R-210
Tare table file ............................................................................................ R-210

Screen logo file ......................................................................... R-211
Screen logo file ......................................................................................... R-211

Additional PLU program file..................................................... R-211
Additional PLU program file ...................................................................... R-211

External device serial number file ........................................... R-211
External device serial number file ............................................................ R-211

Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file .................................... R-211
Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file ..................................................... R-211

Free function list file ................................................................. R-212
Free function list file.................................................................................. R-212

Additional PLU character file ................................................... R-212
Additional PLU character file .................................................................... R-212

System files ............................................................................... R-213
Key table ................................................................................................... R-213
Touch screen key table ............................................................................. R-213
System connection table .......................................................................... R-213
I/O parameter table................................................................................... R-214
Printer connection table ............................................................................ R-214
System error log ....................................................................................... R-214
Auto program control ................................................................................ R-214
LCD color control ...................................................................................... R-214

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-183

File Format
A-2-49-9
A-2-49-10
A-2-49-11
A-2-49-12
A-2-49-14
A-2-49-15
A-2-49-16
A-2-49-17
A-2-49-18
A-2-49-19

R-184

Keyboard color definition .......................................................................... R-215
Keyboard color theme .............................................................................. R-215
Keyboard bitmap image ............................................................................ R-215
TCP/IP control .......................................................................................... R-216
FTP Login Name ...................................................................................... R-216
FTP Server Name .................................................................................... R-216
FTP Trans file ........................................................................................... R-216
Character key table file ............................................................................. R-216
PS2 key table file ...................................................................................... R-217
Key table (full screen) file ......................................................................... R-217

A-2. File format
A-2-1.

Fixed totalizer file

A-2-1-1

Fixed totalizer (daily)
File name: Fixed totalizer (daily)

Character

A-2-1-2

Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 85 (fixed)

Counter Totalizer

Fixed totalizer (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

File No.: 001

Fixed totalizer (periodic 1)
Fixed totalizer (periodic 2)
Fixed totalizer (daily consolidation)
Fixed totalizer (periodic 1 consolidation)
Fixed totalizer (periodic 2 consolidation)
Fixed totalizer (consolidation work)

101
201
301
401
501
601

Counter Totalizer

Rec No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030

Contents
Gross sales total
Net sales total
Cash in drawer
Cash declared amount
Declared short cash amount
Declared over cash amount
Charge in drawer
Charge declared amount
Declared short charge amount
Declared over charge amount
Check in drawer
Check declared amount
Declared short check amount
Declared over check amount
Credit in drawer
Credit declared amount
Declared short credit amount
Declared over credit amount
Food stamp in drawer
Food stamp cash change
EBT in drawer
EBT cash change
Refund mode total
Customer count
Average sales per customer
Check cashing service fee
New balance fee
future use
Clerk commission 1 total
Clerk commission 2 total

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Rec No.
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060

Contents
Foreign currency cash in drawer 1
Foreign currency check in drawer 1
Foreign currency cash in drawer 2
Foreign currency check in drawer 2
Foreign currency cash in drawer 3
Foreign currency check in drawer 3
Reduction
Item return
Clear count
future use
Rounding
ST transfer void
Consecutive No. start (Philippine)
Consecutive No. end (Philippine)
Last GT 1 (Philippine)
Last GT 2 (Philippine)
Last GT 3 (Philippine)
future use
future use
Taxable amount 1
Tax 1
Tax exempt 1
Taxable amount 2
Tax 2
Tax exempt 2
Taxable amount 3
Tax 3
Tax exempt 3
Taxable amount 4
Tax 4

Rec No.
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085

Contents
Tax exempt 4
Taxable amount 5
Tax 5
Tax exempt 5
Taxable amount 6
Tax 6
Tax exempt 6
Taxable amount 7
Tax 7
Tax exempt 7
Taxable amount 8
Tax 8
Tax exempt 8
Taxable amount 9
Tax 9
Tax exempt 9
Taxable amount 10
Tax 10
Tax exempt 10
Euro cash in drawer
Euro charge in drawer
Euro check in drawer
Euro credit in drawer
Coupon total
Money declaration count

R-185

File Format
A-2-2.

Transaction key file

A-2-2-1

Transaction key (daily)
File name: Transaction key (daily)

0 2

Function code

A-2-2-2

File No.: 002

Character

28
Program

@/Rate Counter Totalizer

Transaction key (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Transaction key (periodic 1)
File No.:
Transaction key (periodic 2)
File No.:
Transaction key (daily consolidation)
File No.:
Transaction key (periodic 1 consolidation)
File No.:
File name: Transaction key (periodic 2 consolidation)
File No.:
File name: Transaction key (consolidation work)
File No.:
0

Max. allocatable records: 999

102
202
302

Max. allocatable records: 999
Max. allocatable records: 999
Max. allocatable records: 999

402

Max. allocatable records: 999

502
602

Max. allocatable records: 999
Max. allocatable records: 999

Counter Totalizer

A-2-3-1

Subdepartment (daily)
File name: Subdepartment (daily)

16
Character

A-2-3-2

Program

Link

Max. allocatable records: 99

35 36 37 41

@ HALO

Subdepartment (periodic 1)
File No.:
Subdepartment (periodic 2)
File No.:
Subdepartment (daily consolidation)
File No.:
Subdepartment (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.:
Subdepartment (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.:
Subdepartment (consolidation work)
File No.:
10

Counter Totalizer Discount
totalizer

R-186

47 48
Pulldown
Group
link

Counter Totalizer

63
Discount
totalizer

Subdepartment (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

File No.: 003
26

Color link

Subdepartment file

Double Bon
Order char. link
Order

A-2-3.

103
203
303
403
503
603

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

File name: PLU

File No.: 004

Character

66
Pulldown
Group
link

95
Weight

49 51

54 55 56 60

HALO

100

House
Bon
quantity

PLU (periodic/consolidation)

PLU (periodic 1)
PLU (periodic 2)
PLU (daily consolidation)
PLU (periodic 1 consolidation)
PLU (periodic 2 consolidation)
PLU (consolidation work)
10

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

104
204
304
404
504
604

Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999

File No.: 054

Max. allocatable records: 9999

Stock Counter Totalizer Discount Weight
quantity
totalizer

A-2-4-3

Link

Discount
Stock
Counter Totalizer totalizer
quantity

Not
used

File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

House
Bon
quantity

PLU 2nd@
File name: PLU 2nd@

24
Character

QT-6600 Reference Manual

34
Program

2nd Unit Not
Link 2nd@ Q'ty stock used

49 50

Not used

A-2-4-2

Program

Max. allocatable records: 9999

Double Bon
Order char. link
Order

PLU (daily)

Minimum
stock
Set menu
link

A-2-4-1

Unit stock

PLU file

Random
code

A-2-4.

R-187

File Format
A-2-4-4

Shift PLU (daily)
File name: Shift PLU

Unit price
shift 8

Unit price
shift 7

Unit price
shift 6

Unit price
shift 3

Unit price
shift 2

Unit price
shift 5

Unit price
shift 4

File No.: 055

Max. allocatable records: 9999

Link 2 ~ 8

Counter Totalizer Counter
shift 2
shift 2
shift 3

PGM2 ~ 8

104

109

114

119

Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer
shift 3
shift 4
shift 4
shift 5
shift 5
shift 8
shift 6
shift 6
shift 7
shift 7
shift 8

A-2-4-5

Shift PLU (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Shift PLU (periodic 1)
Shift PLU (periodic 2)
Shift PLU (daily consolidation)
Shift PLU (periodic 1 consolidation)
Shift PLU (periodic 2 consolidation)
Shift PLU (consolidation work)
10

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
30

155
255
355
455
555
655
35

Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
40

Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer Counter
shift 2
shift 2
shift 3
shift 3
shift 4
shift 4
shift 5
shift 5
shift 6
shift 6
shift 7

Totalizer Counter Totalizer
shift 7
shift 8
shift 8

R-188

A-2-5-1

Scanning PLU

File No.: 016

OBR code

A-2-5-2

Character

30
Link

PGM

33
@

not used

PGM Link

14 15

Mix & match

A-2-5-3

Counter Totalizer

52 53

Discount
total

Counter Totalizer

Max. allocatable records:
25

File name: Scan Mix & match (daily)
19
Amount/ rate

Character

100000

Discount
total

File No.: 056
23

PGM

29
Free item
OBR code

Max. allocatable records: 99
39

Work

Counter Totalizer

Scan Mix & match (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Scan Mix & match (periodic 1)
File No.:
Scan Mix & match (periodic 2)
File No.:
Scan Mix & match (daily consolidation) File No.:
Scan Mix & match (periodic 1 consolidation)
File No.:
File name: Scan Mix & match (periodic 2 consolidation)
File No.:
File name: Scan Mix & match (consolidation work) File No.:
0

Scan Mix & match (daily)

A-2-5-4

Scanning PLU shift
File name: Scanning PLU shift file (1) ~ (6)
File No.: 116, 216, 316, 416, 516, 616

Max. allocatable records: 100000
36 37

not used

File name: Scanning PLU

Clerk

Scanning PLU file

Mix & match

A-2-5.

156
256
356

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

456

Max. allocatable records: 99

556
656

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-189

File Format
Batch maintenance

Price level

0 1

A-2-5-6

OBR code

File No.: 070
23

Character

PGM

31
Link

Max. allocatable records: 1000

34
@

37 38 39
Mix & match
Status

File name: Batch maintenance file

not used

A-2-5-5

Multi EAN link
File name: Multi EAN link file

File No.: 075

Max. allocatable records: 100000

File No.: 976

Max. allocatable records: 999

File No.: 077

Max. allocatable records: 999

OBR code OBR code
Parent
item

Link item

A-2-5-7

Non PLU table
File name: Non PLU table file

Program

A-2-5-8

NLU table
File name: NLU table file

6
File-076
rec-#

R-190

12
OBR code

A-2-6.

Department file

A-2-6-1

Department (daily)

Character

A-2-6-2

Program

Link

32 35

38 39 40 44

50 51

HALO

Pulldown
Group
link

CounterTotalizer

Discount
totalizer

Department (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Color link

Max. allocatable records: 99

Double Bon
Order char. link
Order

File No.: 005
Random code

File name: Department (daily)

Department (periodic 1)
Department (periodic 2)
Department (daily consolidation)
Department (periodic 1 consolidation)
Department (periodic 2 consolidation)
Department (consolidation work)
10

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

105
205
305
405
505
605

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer Discount
totalizer

The contents of each field for PLU, department, subdepartment and PLU 2nd@
Program field for PLU, department, subdepartment, PLU 2nd@
Refer to the “Elementary program” on page 199 of the programming manual.
Link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department, PLU 2nd@)
Refer to the “Field 11-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.
Random code field (for PLU, department)
Refer to the “Field 12-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.
Set menu link field (for PLU)
Refer to the “Field 13-066” on page 200 of the programming manual.
Unit/minimum stock field (for PLU, PLU 2nd@)
Refer to the “Field 14-066-1/-2” on page 201 of the programming manual.
HALO field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 15-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.
Order character link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 16-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.
Double Bon field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 17-066” on page 201 of the programming manual.
Order character link field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 20-066” on page 202 of the programming manual.
Pulldown group field (for PLU, subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 21-066” on page 203 of the programming manual.
Color link field (for subdepartment, department)
Refer to the “Field 22-066” on page 203 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-191

File Format
A-2-7.

Group file

A-2-7-1

Group (daily)
File name: Group (daily)

Character

A-2-7-2

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

Group (periodic 1)
Group (periodic 2)
Group (daily consolidation)
Group (periodic 1 consolidation)
Group (periodic 2 consolidation)
Group (consolidation work)
10

Counter Totalizer

R-192

Max. allocatable records: 99

Group (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

File No.: 006

106
206
306
406
506
606

Clerk file

A-2-8-1

Clerk (programming)
File name: Clerk (programming)
16

Character

19 20 22

Clerk interrupt
check #
Drawer #
Clerk #

File No.: 007

Clerk
control

Commission
rate

A-2-8.

37
Table #
range

Function Function
Function Function Arrangement
control (2) control (3) control (4) control (5)
control

Max. allocatable records: 99
44
Menu/@
control

91
Report
control

49
Mode
control

55
Function
control (1)

97
not used

Commission rate
Refer to the “Commission rate” on page 185 of the programming manual.
Table range
Refer to the “Table range” on page 185 of the programming manual.
Clerk control
Refer to the “Record 01-067” on page 186 of the programming manual.
Menu/@ control
Refer to the “Record 02-067” on page 187 of the programming manual.
Mode control
Refer to the “Record 03-067” on page 188 of the programming manual.
Function control 1
Refer to the “Record 04-067” on page 189 of the programming manual.
Function control 2
Refer to the “Record 05-067” on page 190 of the programming manual.
Function control 3
Refer to the “Record 06-067” on page 191 of the programming manual.
Function control 4
Refer to the “Record 07-067” on page 192 of the programming manual.
Function control 5
Refer to the “Record 08-067” on page 193 of the programming manual.
Arrangement control
Refer to the “Record 09-067” on page 194 of the programming manual.
Report control
Refer to the “Record 10-067” on page 195 of the programming manual.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-193

File Format
A-2-8-2

Clerk detail (daily, periodic / consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Clerk detail (daily)
Clerk detail (periodic 1)
Clerk detail (periodic 2)
Clerk detail (daily consolidation)
Clerk detail (periodic 1 consolidation)
Clerk detail (periodic 2 consolidation)
Clerk detail (consolidation work)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

011
111
211
311
411
511
611

Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801
Max. allocatable records: 9801

Counter Totalizer

A-2-8-3

Clerk detail link
File name: Clerk detail link

A-2-8-4

File No.: 027

Max. allocatable records: 300

Clerk (i-Button) key ID
File name: Clerk (i-Button) key ID

12
i-Button key ID
character

R-194

Max. allocatable records: 99

File No.

Record No.

File No.: 030

17
Program

A-2-9.

Hourly sales file

A-2-9-1

Hourly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Hourly sales (daily)
Hourly sales (periodic 1)
Hourly sales (periodic 2)
Hourly sales (daily consolidation)
Hourly sales (periodic 1 consolidation)
Hourly sales (periodic 2 consolidation)
Hourly sales (consolidation work)
10

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

009
109
209
309
409
509
609

Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96
Max. allocatable records: 96

010
110
210
310
410
510
610

Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 32 (fixed)

Counter Totalizer No. of Merchandise
(Net)
(Net) customer subtotal

A-2-10. Monthly sales file
A-2-10-1 Monthly sales (daily, periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Monthly sales (daily)
Monthly sales (periodic 1)
Monthly sales (periodic 2)
Monthly sales (daily consolidation)
Monthly sales (periodic 1 consolidation)
Monthly sales (periodic 2 consolidation)
Monthly sales (consolidation work)
10

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

Counter Totalizer Counter Totalizer
(Gross) (Gross)
(Net)
(Net)

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-195

File Format
A-2-11. Hourly item file
A-2-11-1 Hourly item
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Counter

Hourly Item (daily)
Hourly Item (periodic 1)
Hourly Item (periodic 2)
Hourly Item (daily consolidation)
Hourly Item (periodic 1 consolidation)
Hourly Item (periodic 2 consolidation)
Hourly Item (consolidation work)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

021
121
221
321
421
521
621

Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920
Max. allocatable records: 1920

Totalizer

A-2-11-2 Hourly item link (Hourly production link)
File name: Hourly item link

Max. allocatable records: 480

File No.

Record No.

File No.: 031

Description
Link record No.

Choice
Significant
number

R-196

D8 D7 D6 D5

;

Always “0”
Link file No.

Program code

::::
D4

Significant
number

:::
D3 D2 D1

A-2-12. Mix and match file
A-2-12-1 Mix and match (daily)
File name: Mix and match (daily)

Comb 1
item

Comb 2
item

Comb 3
item

Comb 4
item

Comb 5
item

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Quantity

Rec. No.
File No.

Discount
amount
or
rate

Character

Max. allocatable records: 99

19 22 24 30 36 38 40 41 43 45 46 48 50 51 53 55 56 58 60 61 63 65 66
Work

Program
Random
code
Work

File No.: 051

Target
item

Counter Totalizer

A-2-12-2 Mix and match (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Counter

Mix and match (periodic 1)
File No.: 151
Mix and match (periodic 2)
File No.: 251
Mix and match (daily consolidation)
File No.: 351
Mix and match (periodic 1 consolidation) File No.: 451
Mix and match (periodic 2 consolidation) File No.: 551
Mix and match (consolidation work)
File No.: 651

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

Totalizer

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-197

File Format
A-2-13. IDC file
A-2-13-1 IDC file (1)
File name: IDC (1)
File name: IDC (1) (daily consolidation)
File name: IDC (1) (consolidation work)

File No.: 057
File No.: 357
File No.: 657

Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000
60

IDC Data

A-2-13-2 IDC file (2)
File name: IDC (2)
File name: IDC (2) (daily consolidation)
File name: IDC (2) (consolidation work)
File structure is same as IDC file (1)

File No.: 058
File No.: 358
File No.: 658

Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000

File No.: 059
File No.: 359
File No.: 659

Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000
Max. allocatable records: 100000

A-2-13-3 IDC file (3)
File name: IDC (3)
File name: IDC (3) (daily consolidation)
File name: IDC (3) (consolidation work)
File structure is same as IDC file (1)

Refer to the page 75 ~ 81 of this manual for each IDC data in detail.

A-2-13-4 IDC link
File name: IDC link
4

Max. allocatable records: 999

File No.

Link
PGM
Record No.

0 1 2

File No.: 804

Refer to page 64 of the programming manual for details.

R-198

A-2-14. Time & Attendance file
A-2-14-1 Hourly / Labor
File name: Hourly / Labor
10

Counter Totalizer
(Net)
(Net)

18
Total
labor
cost
(Fixed)

Total labor
hours (Not fixed)

Total labor
hours (Fixed)

File No.: 014

Max. allocatable records: 96

File No.: 019
File No.: 319

Max. allocatable records: 4158
Max. allocatable records: 4158

26
Total
labor
cost
(Not fixed)

A-2-14-2. Work time file
File name: Work Time
File name: Work Time (daily consolidation)

Min. number of files to fix the work time:
The number of employee × 7 (days) × 3 (shift) × 2 (weeks)
Max. allocatable records:
99 × 7 × 3 × 2 = 4158
Rec#001~#003:
Rec#004~#006:
Rec#007~#009:
Rec#010~#012:
Rec#013~#015:
Rec#016~#018:
Rec#019~#021:
Rec#020~#024:
Rec#025~#027:
Rec#028~#030:
Rec#031~#033:
Rec#034~#036:
Rec#037~#039:
Rec#040~#042:

Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 2nd day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 3rd day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 4th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 5th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 6th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 7th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 2nd day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 3rd day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 4th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 5th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 6th day of the week of Employee
Correspond to 7th day of the week of Employee

Rec#043~#045: Correspond to 1st day of the week of Employee
•
•
•

Rec#002 (First week)

13 15 17 18
Cash tip
declare

QT-6600 Reference Manual

EDIT flag

BREAK time

WORK time

Job code
CLOCK-IN
date
CLOCK-IN
time
CLOCK-OUT
time

0 1

Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (First week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)
Rec#001 (Second week)

R-199

File Format
A-2-14-3. Time zone file
File name: Time zone
File No.: 800 Max. allocatable records: 24
Divide one day into some time zones, and assign the length of one cycle per zone.
6

Cycle

End time

Start time

Refer to page 60 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-14-4. Employee file
File name: Employee
19

24 25 2627 282930 32 34 36
Social
Security
No.

Character

Max. allocatable records: 99

PGM
Job code (1)
Job code (2)
Job code (3)
Job code (4)
Clerk No.

Employee No.

File No.: 801

WorkWorkWork
(1) (2) (3)

Refer to page 62 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-14-5. Job code file
File name: Job code

File No.: 802

Character

Max. allocatable records: 50

20 22
Pay
rate

not used

16 17
PGM

Refer to page 61 of the programming manual for details.

R-200

A-2-14-6. Schedule file
File name: Schedule

File No.: 803

Max. allocatable records: 2079

Min. number of files to fix the work time: The number of employee × 7 days × 3 shift
Max. allocatable records: 99 × 7 × 3 = 2079
Rec#001: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#002: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#003: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#004: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#005: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#006: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001
•
•
Rec#021: Correspond to 7th day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#001
Rec#022: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#002
Rec#023: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#002
Rec#024: Correspond to 1st day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#002
Rec#025: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 1 of Employee Rec#002
Rec#026: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 2 of Employee Rec#002
Rec#027: Correspond to 2nd day of the week Shift 3 of Employee Rec#002
•
•
7 8 9 1011

Break time
Grace before start
Grace after start
Grace before end
Grace after end

End time

Job code
Start time

0 1

A-2-14-7. Simple time and attendance file
File name: Simple time and attendance

Max. allocatable records: 9999

File No.: 944

Max. allocatable records: 10

Not used
Clock-out reason

15 16 17

Clock-out time

Clock-in time

Personal No.

Work

File No.: 013

A-2-14-8. Clock-out reason file
File name: Clock-out reason
0

Character

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-201

File Format
A-2-15. Void table file
A-2-15-1 Void table (daily)
File name: Void table (daily)
19

Program

File No.: 012

Character

Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

Refer to page 54 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-15-2 Void table (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Void table (periodic 1)
Void table (periodic 2)
Void table (daily consolidation)
Void table (periodic 1 consolidation)
Void table (periodic 2 consolidation)
Void table (consolidation work)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

112
212
312
412
512
612

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

File No.: 018

Max. allocatable records: 99

Counter Totalizer

A-2-16. Table analysis file
A-2-16-1 Table analysis (daily)
File name: Table analysis (daily)
Max. check #

Character

2223

not used

Min. check #

No. of
Totalizer
customer

A-2-16-2 Table analysis (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Table analysis (periodic 1)
Table analysis (periodic 2)
Table analysis (daily consolidation)
Table analysis (periodic 1 consolidation)
Table analysis (periodic 2 consolidation)
Table analysis (consolidation work)
10

Counter Totalizer

R-202

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

118
218
318
418
518
618

Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99
Max. allocatable records: 99

A-2-17. Grand total file
A-2-17-1 Grand total (daily)
File name: Grand total (daily)
0

Character

File No.: 020

Max. allocatable records:3 (fixed)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)
Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

Totalizer

A-2-17-2 Grand total (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Grand total (periodic 1)
Grand total (periodic 2)
Grand total (daily consolidation)
Grand total (periodic 1 consolidation)
Grand total (periodic 2 consolidation)
Grand total (consolidation work)

120
220
320
420
520
620

Totalizer

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-203

File Format
A-2-18. Customer file
A-2-18-1 Customer file
79

103

127 133 134 135 140

Customer Customer Customer Customer Customer
name
address 1 address 2 address 3 address 4

150

145
Discount GT

Finalized GT

Customer
number

Max. allocatable records: 4000
not used

6 7
Title link

File No.: 037

Customer
phone No.
Customer
group link
Status

File name: Customer file

170
Not used

A-2-18-2 Customer group file (daily)
Max. allocatable records: 20
117

122

Not used

Discount 1 Discount 2 Discount 3 Discount 4

112

Counter

102 107

Program

Character

82 98

Program

Character

Program

Character

62 78

Spent total

File No.: 042

42 58

Program

Credit
limit

Character

21 22 38

Print control

Customer
group
name

Type

16 17

Not used

File name: Customer group (daily)
0

A-2-18-3 Customer group (periodic/consolidation)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
0

Customer group (periodic 1)
Customer group (periodic 2)
Customer group (daily consolidation)
Customer group (periodic 1 consolidation)
Customer group (periodic 2 consolidation)
Customer group (consolidation work)
10

Counter

Spent
total

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

142
242
342
442
542
642

Max. allocatable records:
Max. allocatable records:
Max. allocatable records:
Max. allocatable records:
Max. allocatable records:
Max. allocatable records:

20
20
20
20
20
20

15
Not
used

A-2-18-3 Customer title
File name: Customer title
0

Character

R-204

File No.: 123

Max. allocatable records: 9

A-2-19. General control file
A-2-19-1 General control
File name: General control
0

File No.: 022

Max. allocatable records: 50(fixed)

Program

Rec No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Contents
Date order, Monetary mode
(not used)
Consecutive number
Rounding, Tax system
Receipt control (1)
Calculation, Operation control (1)
Calculation, Operation control (2)
Report control (1)
Report control (2)
Receipt control (2), Till timer
Scale
Report control (3)
Communication control
Report control (4)
Report control (5)
Time frame
Receipt control (3), Calculation method
Slip / Guest receipt control
Journal control (Electronic journal)
Message print control
Order control (1)
Hotel server
Australian GST control (1)
Australian GST control (2), Loyalty card
Set menu, Condiment
Check tracking
Clerk interrupt
Display control
(not used)
Order control (2)
Touch screen
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
Time & Attendance
Store / Recall range
Auto check No. range
(not used)
Automatic creating customer No. range
(not used)
(not used)
Customer control (1)
Customer control (2)
Sound control
Work time
Pay ratio
Order control (3)
VMP stop code
External device
Commission threshold

Reference page
(PGM manual)
129
--130
130
131
132
--133
134
135
--136
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
142
143
143
143
144
144
145
146
146
----146
------147
147
147
--------148
148
149

R-205

File Format
A-2-20. Special character file
A-2-20-1 Special character
File name: Special character
0

File No.: 023

Max. allocatable records: 99(fixed)

Character

Refer to page 134 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-21. Report header file
A-2-20-1 Report header
File name: Report header
0

File No.: 024

Max. allocatable records: 55(fixed)

Character

Refer to page 135 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-22. Tax table file
A-2-19-1 Tax table
File name: Tax table
4

Rate

R-206

6 7

8 10 12 14

Max. Table
amount
Rounding
Singapore
rounding
Cal. type
Cyclic pattern
Cyclic value
Non cyclic value

File No.: 025
74
Actual
value

Max. allocatable records: 10

QT-6600 Reference Manual

File No.20

Record No.20

File No.19

Record No.19

File No.18

Record No.18

not used

File No. 28
Key color link 28

Record No. 28

Keytop
text 28
not used

885 887 889 890 893

Record No.14

File No.13

Record No.13

File No.12

Record No.12

File No.11

53 54 55 56

Record No.11

File No.: 028

File No.10

File No. 2
Key color link 2

File No.: 026

Record No.10

File No. 9

Record No. 9

File name: Set menu table

File No. 8

Keytop
text 1
Record No. 2

File name: Pulldown group

Record No. 8

not used

File No. 1
Key color link 1

Record No. 1

Key type

Win color link

Program

16 19 20 21 23 25 26 29

File No. 7

Record No. 7

File No. 6

Record No. 6

File No. 5

Record No. 5

File No. 4

Record No. 4

File No. 3

Character

File No.17

Record No. 3

Record No.17

File No. 2

File No.16

Record No. 2

Record No.16

File No. 1

Record No. 1

File No.15

Record No.15

File No.14

A-2-23. Pulldown group file

A-2-23-1 Pulldown group
Max. allocatable records: 999
917 921

A-2-24. Set menu table file

A-2-24-1 Set menu table

Max. allocatable records: 999

10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54

56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80

R-207

File Format
A-2-25. Batch X/Z file
A-2-25-1 Batch X/Z
File name: Batch X/Z

File No.: 029

Max. allocatable records: 10

File No.: 032

Max. allocatable records: 96

Program
Mode
X/Z code (1)
X/Z code (2)
X/Z code (3)
X/Z code (4)
X/Z code (5)
X/Z code (6)
X/Z code (7)
X/Z code (8)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A-2-26. Receipt / Slip message file
A-2-26-1 Receipt / Slip message
File name: Receipt / Slip message
0

Character

Refer to page 132 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-27. Check endorsement message file
A-2-27-1 Check endorsement message
File name: Check endorsement message
0

Max. allocatable records: 4
40

Character

R-208

File No.: 033

A-2-28. Arrangement file
A-2-28-1 Arrangement group (1) ~ (5)
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Arrangement group (1)
Arrangement group (2)
Arrangement group (3)
Arrangement group (4)
Arrangement group (5)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

038
138
238
338
438

Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999
Max. allocatable records: 9999

File No.: 039

Max. allocatable records: 9999

0
Arrange
(character)

A-2-29. Character recall file
A-2-29-1 Character recall
File name: Character recall

Character

A-2-30. Check print file
A-2-30-1 Check print
File name: Check print

File No.: 041

Max. allocatable records: 9

File No.: 047

Max. allocatable records: 432 (fixed)
or 864 (fixed)

Control
data

A-2-31. Graphic logo file
A-2-31-1 Graphic logo (external printer)
File name: Graphic logo (external printer)
13

Graphic data

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-209

File Format
A-2-32. Scheduler file
A-2-32-1 Scheduler
File name: Scheduler

Max. allocatable records: 99

Not used

file No.

12 14

Arrange tbl No.

Interval 2

Interval 1

Start time

End time

File No.: 062

Refer to page 48 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-33. Order character file
A-2-33-1 Order character
File name: Order character

File No.: 065

Max. allocatable records: 99

File No.: 099

Max. allocatable records: 3 (fixed)

0
Order character

A-2-34. Euro program file
A-2-34-1 Euro program file
File name: Euro program
0

Program

Refer to page 181 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-35. Character conversion for CF file
A-2-35-1 Character conversion for CF file
File name: Character conversion for CF
0

R-210

Program

File No.: 087

Max. allocatable records: 1000

A-2-36. Check# pop-up window definition file
A-2-36-1 Check# pop-up window definition file
File name: Check# pop-up window definition
6 7
Bitmap link

Key type

Check number

3 4

Max. allocatable records: 700(fixed)

not used

File No.: 115

Refer to page 182 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-37. Clerk pop-up window definition file
A-2-37-1 Clerk pop-up window definition file
File name: Clerk pop-up window definition

Max. allocatable records: 315

5 6

not used

Key type

Clerk rec. No.

Bitmap link

Key color link

File No.: 117

Refer to page 197 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-38. Sound file
A-2-38-1 Sound (1) ~ (10) file
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:
File name:

Sound (1)
Sound (2)
Sound (3)
Sound (4)
Sound (5)
Sound (6)
Sound (7)
Sound (8)
Sound (9)
Sound (10)

File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:
File No.:

701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710

Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
Max. allocatable records: 65000
128

Data

Sound file: (in case of creating by PC)
1. .wav file
2. PCM recording
3. Sampling frequency; 11.025 / 22.050 / 44.100 kHz
4. 16 bit monaural

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-211

File Format
A-2-39. Add on VMP file
A-2-39-1 Add on VMP file
File name: Add on VMP

File No.: 040

Max. allocatable records: 999

File No.: 050

Max. allocatable records: 100000

Data

A-2-40. Intelligent EJ file
A-2-40-1 Intelligent EJ file
File name: Intelligent EJ
0

101

Data

A-2-41. Menu title character file
A-2-41-1 Menu title character file
File name: Menu title character

File No.: 085

Max. allocatable records: 60
40

Character

A-2-42. Tare table file
A-2-42-1 Tare table file
File name: Tare table
0

Character

R-212

File No.: 127
22

PGM

Max. allocatable records: 9

A-2-43. Screen logo file
A-2-43-1 Screen logo file
File name: Screen logo

160

File No.: 796

Max. allocatable records: 9833 (fixed)

Bipmap

A-2-44. Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file
A-2-44-1 Full screen check window (1) ~ (3) file
File name: Full screen check window
File No.: 797, 798, 799

Max. allocatable records: 9833 (fixed)

160

Bipmap

A-2-45. Additional PLU program file
A-2-45-1 Additional PLU program file
File name: Additional PLU program
15

Max. allocatable records: 9999

44 46

not used

Work

Price 3

Program

Price 2

Color Link

File No.: 814

A-2-46. External device serial number file
A-2-46-1 External device serial number file
File name: External device serial number
0

File No.: 920

Max. allocatable records: 4

PGM

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-213

File Format
A-2-47. Additional PLU character file
A-2-47-1 Additional PLU character file
File name: Additional PLU character
0

PLU code

Character

File No.: 941

Max. allocatable records: 9999

File No.: 946

Max. allocatable records: 99

PGM

A-2-48. Free function list file
A-2-48-1 Free function list file
File name: Free function list
2
Rec-No.

R-214

A-2-49. System files
A-2-49-1 Key table
File name: Key table

Rec No.

Func code

Max. allocatable records: 2 (fixed)

not used

File No.: 074

Key table
record No.
001
002

Hard key
code
not used
for Disp on/off

A-2-49-2 Touch screen key table
File name: Touch screen key table
6
Color link

File No.: 174

8 9

Max. allocatable records: 2280(fixed)

Bitmap link
not used

4
Rec No.

Func code

Key type

Keytop text

A-2-49-3 System connection table
File name: System connection table
0

Logical ID

Distinct M/BM
CHK PGM Status
CHK PGM
not used
not used
Check cluster No.

12 14 16 18

File No.: 901

Max. allocatable records: 33

IP address

Description

Choice

Program code

::::::
Logical ID characters (within 12 characters)

Significant
characters

D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19

::::::
D18 D17 D16 D15 D14 D13

Terminal:
Oneself = 02, Others = 01

Significant
numbers

Check tracking master/backup master (program value):
Master = 01, Backup master = 02, Self master = 03, Satellite = 00

Significant
numbers

Check tracking master/backup master (current value):
Master = 01, Backup master = 02, Self master = 03, Satellite = 00

Significant
numbers

D12 D11

::
D10 D9

::
D8 D7

;;;;;

Always “00000”
Check tracking cluster number (0 ~ 9)
(“0” means no designation.)

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2

Significant
number

:
D1

IP address: 192.168.0.0. ~ 192.168.255.255

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-215

File Format
A-2-49-4 I/O parameter table
File name: I/O parameter table
0

File No.: 902

Max. allocatable records: 20

8
Program

Refer to page 55 ~ 58 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-5 Printer connection table
File name: Printer connection table

Type

Main ECR ID

Max. allocatable records: 99

252627

Backup ECR ID

Main printer No.
Backup printer No.

0 1

File No.: 903

Refer to page 176 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-6 System error log
File name: System error log

Max. allocatable records: 999

Error function

Time

Error code

6 7 9

Date

Terminal No.

Operation

File No.: 999

Refer to page 96, 228, 229 of this manual for details.

A-2-49-7 Auto program control
File name: Auto program control

Max. allocatable records: 20

File No.
Program

File No.: 905

Refer to page 65 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-8 LCD color control
File name: LCD color control
0

File No.: 906

Max. allocatable records: 99

8
Program

Refer to page 66 of the programming manual for details.

R-216

A-2-49-9 Keyboard color definition
File name: Keyboard color definition
0

File No.: 907

Max. allocatable records: 100

9
Program

Refer to page 71 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-10 Keyboard color theme
File name: Keyboard color theme
0

File No.: 908

Max. allocatable records: 100

9
Program

Refer to page 70 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-11 Keyboard bitmap image
File name: Keyboard bitmap image (for single key) File No.: 909
File name: Keyboard bitmap image
File No.: 910

Max. allocatable records: 29400
Max. allocatable records: 93600

200
Data

Bitmap file: (in case of creating by PC)
1. Windows bitmap file
2. Max. 16.77 million color
3. No. of single key + 2 x No. of double key + 4 x No. of quadruple key is less than
or eqaul to 300. (only for file-910)
4. Key size
Key area Check/ clerk window
File-909 Single key
available
not available
Single key
available
available
File-910

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Horizontal double key
Vertical double key

available
available

Quadruple key

available

R-217

File Format
A-2-49-12 TCP/IP control
File name: TCP/IP control
0

File No.: 900

Max. allocatable records: 26 (fixed)

6
Program

Refer to page 71 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-14 FTP Login Name
File name: FTP login name
0

File No.: 911

Max. allocatable records: 10

File No.: 912

Max. allocatable records: 9

Password

A-2-49-15 FTP Server Name
File name: FTP server name
0

20
IP address

Server title

26
not
used

62
Login-ID

78
Password

98
Login
folder name

Refer to page 73 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-16 FTP Trans file
File name: FTP trans file
20
Program

Title

File No.: 913

Max. allocatable records: 99

22 24
File-No.

File name

Refer to page 73 of the programming manual for details.

A-2-49-17 Character key table file
File name: Character key table
1st Chara code
2nd Chara code
3rd Chara code
4th Chara code
5th Chara code
6th Chara code
7th Chara code
8th Chara code
Color link

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

R-218

File No.: 274

Max. allocatable records: 152 (fixed)

A-2-49-18 PS2 key table file
File name: PS2 key table

File No.: 374

Max. allocatable records: 811 (fixed)

File No.: 795

Max. allocatable records: 240

4 5 6
Record-#

Chara code
CAPS Lock

2
Function code

A-2-49-19 Key table (full screen) file
14

20 21

Key
Text Check/
color color rec-#
(RGB) (RGB)

not used

Key type

10 11

Location (Y2)

Location (X2)

Location (Y1)

Location (X1)

Function code
(binary)

41 42
Keytop text 1

not used

File name: Key table (full screen)

62
Keytop text 2

Location (X1, Y1)
Key
Location (X2, Y2)

Rec-001 ~ 080: Full screen check window 1
Rec-081 ~ 160: Full screen check window 2
Rec-161 ~ 240: Full screen check window 3
Key type
• No key: 00
• Rectangular key: 01
• Circular key: 02

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-219

File Format

R-220

A-3.Counter and Totalizer calculation method ......................................... R-220
A-3-1

Fixed totalizer file ........................................................................................ R-220

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-221

Calculation method
A-3. Counter and Totalizer calculation method
The following calculation methods of fixed totalizer memories are explained in this
chapter.
All formulas in these explanations are calculated in the registration mode.
In the REF mode, the values in totalizers are calculated using the opposite sign.
In the REG– mode, the values in totalizers and counters are calculated using the opposite
sign.

A-3-1

Fixed totalizer file
Total or counter

Gross sales quantity

Gross sales amount

Net sales quantity

Net sales amount

Medium in drawer
(Cash, charge, check, credit)

R-222

Increments or Decrements by
Number of products registered for Departments + Subdepartments + PLUs (non hash)
{For Department, Subdepartment, PLUs and Scan PLUs
: +1
Single items
Multiplication : Input quantity
: Input quantity
Split price
: Input quantity × Input quantity
Square
: Input quantity × Input quantity × Input quantity}
Cube
– Last item void – Return item – Previous item void – Cancel
Amount of products registered for Departments + Subdepartments + PLUs (non hash)
{For Department, Subdepartment, PLUs and Scan PLUs
Single items
: Preset or manually input prices
Multiplication : Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity
Split price
: (Preset or manually input prices / Input unit quantity)
× Input quantity
Square
: Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity
× Input quantity
Cube
: Preset or manually input prices × Input quantity
× Input quantity × Input quantity}
– Last item void – Return item – Previous item void – Cancel
+1 (When a transaction is finalized for sale. For REG– mode –1 is affected.)
Amount at the finalization (exclude tip):
{Department + Subdepartment + PLU +Scan PLU product registration amounts (non full hash)
– Last item void amounts for the above
– Item return amounts for the above
– Previous item void amounts for the above
– Cancel amounts for the above}
+ {Plus (+ key)
+ Premium (%+ key)
– Error correction amounts
– Cancel amounts}
– {Minus (– key)
+ Discount(%– key)
+ Coupon
– Error correction amounts
– Cancel amounts}
+ Results of tax table calculations (add-on tax)
Sales total or tendered total by specified medium
+ Received on account total (Cash in drawer only)
– Paid out (Cash in drawer only)
+ Check cashing (Check in drawer only)
+ Loan totals by selected medium
– Pick up totals by selected medium
– Change amounts generated with the specific medium (Cash in drawer only)
– Total of check cashing transaction (Cash in drawer only)
– corrected amount by key
+ correcting amount by key

Total or counter
Number of Refund mode
Refund mode amount
Customer count
Average sales per customer
Check cashing service fee
New balance fee
Clerk commission total
Foreign currency in drawer
Reduction
Item return amount
Clear count
Rounding
ST transfer void
Taxable amount

Tax amount
Tax exempt
Euro in drawer
Coupon
Money declaration
GT 1

GT 2

GT 3

Increments or Decrements by
+1
(When cash sales, charge sales, credit sales, and check sales transaction are finalized in the
REF/REG– mode.)
Absolute value of total sales amount for REF/REG– mode registrations.
Entered number of covers or +1
Net sales amount / Customer count
+ Check amount × Service ratio or
+ Service fee amount
+ MD/ST amount × Service charge ratio or
+ Service charge fee amount
Item sales (commissionable) × Clerk commission rate or flat fee
Entered amount in foreign currency.
+ Registered amount of Minus, %- key
+ Registered item amount by RF, Void key
+ 1 (REG, REF, REG– mode)
(When the key is pressed.)
+ Fraction amount by country roundings
+ Void total of ST transfer
Subtotal of taxable amount at finalization of sale
(in case of add-on tax)
Subtotal of taxable amount / (1 + VAT rate) at finalization of sale
(in case of add-in tax)
Result of calculation using tax table for taxable amount at finalization of sales
(in case of add-on tax)
Subtotal of taxable amount - Taxable amount calculated above
(in case of add-in tax)
Exempted taxable subtotal amount
Sales total or tendered total by specified medium in Euro
Coupon total
+1 (when money declaration is performed.)
Grand total of net sales total
Registrations absolute value:
{Registration amount (Department, Subdepartment, PLU, Scan PLU)
+ Last item void amount
+ Previous item void amount
+ Refund amount}
+ {Plus, Minus, Premium, Discount, Coupon
+ Last item void amount}
Net sales total
– add-on tax
– add-in tax
– commission

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-223

Calculation method

R-224

A-4. Error messages ................................................................................... R-224
A-4-1
A-4-2
A-4-3

Error messages........................................................................................... R-224
Operation prompt ........................................................................................ R-227
System error code....................................................................................... R-228

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-225

Error messages
A-4. Error messages
A-4-1

Error messages
When an error occurs on a QT-6600 terminal, a buzzer sounds and the appropriate error
message appears on the main display, indicating what action to take.
The following table lists the error messages and describes the action to take.

Prompt message
Operator mistake.
E001 Wrong mode.
E003 Wrong operator.

Meaning
Operation error
Check tracking (Open mode error)
Error clerk/Error clerk in check tracking

E005 Insufficient memory.
E011 Close the drawer.
E016 Change back to REG mode.

Memory allocation over
Drawer compulsory
Prohibit plural operation in REF/REG– mode

E017
E018
E019
E020
E021

Check number compulsory
Table number compulsory
Cover compulsory
Seat number compulsory
Scanning PLU item w/o department link is
registered.
Alarm when any item drops below its programmed
minimum stock quantity during registration.
Error when actual stock value for a registration
items is a negative value.
Scale read error
Scanning PLU is not found or OBR code is
mismatched.
Attempted registration whilst partial tender
operation is being done.

Enter Check/TBL number.
Enter Table number.
Enter Number of covers.
Enter Seat number.
No dept link.

E023 Stock running short.
E024 No stock is available.

E025 Scale Read Error
E028 Not found PLU or C/D is
mismatch.
E029 No registration is possible
while you are in the tender
operation.
E031 Press ST key before Finalization. ST compulsory
E032 Press FSST key before Finalization. FSST compulsory
E033 Enter tendered amount.
Amount tender compulsory
E035 Change amount exceeds the limit.
Change amount exceeds the limit.
E036 Remove money from the drawer.
Contents of the drawer exceed the programmed
limit — Sentinel function.
E037 Digit or Amount Limitation Over.
H.D.L., H.A.L., L.D.L. error
E038 Perform Money Declaration
Money declaration compulsory
E040 Issue Guest Receipt.
Guest receipt compulsory
E041 Print Validation.
Validation compulsory
E044 Print Cheque.
Check print compulsory
E045 Print Check-Endorsement.
Check endorsement compulsory
E046 REG Buffer Full. Please
Registration buffer full
Finalize or NB.
E047 Print bill.
Slip compulsory
E048 Insert Slip paper and retry.
Alarm when no paper is inserted in the Slip.
E049 CHECK memory Full.
Check tracking index full/near end
E050 Detail memory full.
E051 CHK/TBL No. is occupied.

E052 CHK/TBL No. is Busy.
E053 CHK/TBL No. is not opened.

E054 Out of CHK/TBL No. Range.
E056 Store range full.
E057 No item exists in detail.
E058 Enter post entry item.
E059 Press Eat-in or Take-out key.
**********
E060 Printer offline.
**********
E061 Printer error.

R-226

Action
Perform proper operation.
Return the mode to its original setting.
Input correct check number or assign the proper
clerk.
Reallocate memory.
Close cash drawer.
Switch to another mode and then back to the
REF/REG– mode again.
Input a check number.
Input a table number.
Enter the number of customers.
Input a seat number.
Link the item to a department.
Perform stock maintenance.
Perform stock maintenance.
Retry weighing the item.
Re-enter the PLU code.
Finalize the transaction.
Press ST key.
Press FSST key.
Enter tendered amount.
Enter amount tendered again.
Perform pickup operation.

Enter correct unit price/amount.
Perform money declaration.
Issue a guest receipt.
Perform validation operation.
Perform check print operation.
Perform check endorsement operation.
Finalize the transaction.
Allocate sufficient buffer.
Perform slip printing operation.
Insert new slip paper.
Finalize and close the check number currently
used.
Finalize and close the check number currently
Check tracking memory full/near end
used.
Attempt is made to use the key to Finalize and close the check that is currently
under the number that you want to use or use a
open a new check using a number that is already
different check number.
used for an existing check tracking memory.
Use another check number or close the check at
Attempt to use the same check number whilst the
specified number is being used in the other terminal. that terminal.
Use the correct check number (if you want to
Check number not found
reopen a check that already exists in the check
tracking memory) or use to
open a new check.
Enter correct number.
Check number range over
Recall the stored data.
All check number are occupied in range.
Round repeat cannot be found in detail.
Enter Post entry item.
Post entry item has not been registered yet.
Press Eat-in or Takeout key.
Eat-in, Takeout compulsory
Printer offline. “****” means ECR logical ID
and printer number.
Printer downed. “****” means ECR logical ID The contents are printed on the backup printer.
and printer number.

Prompt message
**********
E061 Printer error.
YES:Retry to print.
NO :Show on the screen.
ESC:Discard data.
**********
E062 Printer paper end.
**********
E062 Printer paper end.
YES:Retry to print.
NO :Show on the screen.
ESC:Discard data.
E064 Printer buffer full.
YES:Retry to print.
NO :Show on the screen.
ESC:Discard data.
**********
E070 Terminal out of action.
Cannot print.
**********
E071 Target terminal printer
BF full.
YES:Retry to print.
NO :Show on the screen.
ESC:Discard data.
**********
E072 Target printer terminal
is busy.
**********
E073 Your receipt/order may not be
issued.
YES:Retry to print.
NO :Show on the screen.
ESC:Discard data.
E075 Negative Balance,
Cannot be Finalized.
E080 Electronic Journal Full
Please clear E-Journal.
E082 ***** Illegal Data *****
E083 Cannot create E-Journal.
Check Flash memory.
**********
E105 Check/TBL tracking Master
down. Please call Manager!!
YES:Retry for connection.
NO :Remove it from system.
**********
E106 Check/TBL tracking Backup
master down. Please call
Manager!!
YES:Retry for connection.
NO :Remove it from system.
**********
E107 Both Master&Backup master
down. CHK/TBL tracking or
Clerk interrupt is not
available.
**********
E108 CHK/TBL Master is removed
from system.
**********
E109 CHK/TBL Backup master is
removed from system.
E110 CHK data mismatch between
Master and Backup master.
E130 Middle of Pick up or Loan
Press Cancel Key.
E131 Middle of
Press Cancel Key.
E133 Middle of
Press Cancel Key.
E134 Middle of Clerk Transfer
Press ESC Key.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Meaning
Printer downed. “****” means ECR logical ID
and printer number.

Action
Follow the prompt message.

Paper near-end/end “****” means ECR logical Set new paper.
The contents are printed on the backup printer.
ID and printer number.
Paper near-end/end “****” means ECR logical Follow the prompt message.
ID and printer number.

Print buffer full at sender side

Follow the prompt message.

Down at target ECR which has printer
“****” means ECR logical ID and printer
number.
Printer buffer full at target ECR which has
printer
“****” means ECR logical ID and printer
number.

Please check the terminal

Busy at target ECR which has printer
“****” means ECR logical ID and printer
number.
Time out at ECR which has printer
“****” means ECR logical ID and printer
number.

Follow the prompt message.

Attempted finalization when balance is less than Register item(s) until the balance becomes
positive amount.
zero.
Reset the electronic journal memory.
Electronic journal full
Illegal Electronic journal data
Electronic journal file cannot be created.

Check flash memory.

CHK master down
“****” means ECR logical ID.

Follow the prompt message.

CHK BM down
“****” means ECR logical ID.

Follow the prompt message.

CHK M/BM down
“****” means ECR logical ID.

Master down then take it off from system
“****” means ECR logical ID.
Backup master down then take it off from
system
“****” means ECR logical ID.
Data mismatch has occurred.
During picking up

Follow the prompt message.

During bill copy

Follow the prompt message.

During media change

Follow the prompt message.

During clerk transfer

Follow the prompt message.

R-227

Error messages
Prompt message
E139 Not allowed to be negative
by Minus/Coupon key.
E140 Wrong menu.
E141 Press twice before
finalization.
E145 Arrangement syntax error.
E150 Incorrect value entry.
E151 Incorrect Key Pressed.
E152 PGM File or Memory number
does not Exist.
E164 Employee No. is not Found
in the Employee File.
E165 Employee No. is not Clocking-in.
E166 Employee No. is Occupied.
E167 Incorrect Job code.
E168 Your Operation is out of
Schedule.
Please Call Manager.
E169 Work Hours Exceeded.
Please Call Manager.
E170 No Shift Remains in the
Schedule.
You cannot Clock-in.
E171 Please Break-out and Retry.
E172 Break Hours Exceeded.
Please Call Manager.
E173 This employee is at work now.
E174 This employee is taking a break
now.
E175 Please Clock-in/Break-out
before you sign on.
or Please Call Manager.
E176 You cannot Clock-in.
Please reset Employee Report.
E177 Time&Attendance Data
Communication Error.
Please Call Manager.
E180 IDC FILE (1) memory full.
Please clear IDC data.
E181 IDC FILE (2) memory full.
Please clear IDC data.
E182 IDC FILE (3) memory full.
Please clear IDC data.
E184 OPEN CHK/TBL data exist.
E185
E200
E201
E203
E205

Item is not active.
Insert CF Card.
Format error.
Insufficient memory.
The file already exists.
Do you replace?
YES:Replace the file.
NO :Input new name.
E210 Mag Card Reader Error.
E211 Wrong Card Prefix Code.
E212 Card Expired.
E213 Card Validation Failed.
E215 Card Format Error.
E240 Customer No. is occupied.
E241 Customer memory full.
E242 Customer not found.
E243 Illegal Site ID.
E244 Credit limit over.

E251 Magnetic card error.
E252 Enter customer name.
E253 Enter address.

R-228

Meaning
Credit balance error

Action
Enter proper minus/coupon amount.

This menu is prohibited by program.
key is not pressed twice
before finalization.
Arrangement syntax error
Incorrect entry for PGM
Linking is incorrect.
No such file, no such record

Set correct menu.
Follow the prompt message.

Employee No. is not set in the Employee File.

Enter employee number again.

Employee has not done CLOCK-IN operation
yet.
Employee who has done CLOCK-IN operation
attempts to operate CLOCK-IN again.
Employee attempts to operate CLOCK-IN with
incorrect JOB code.
Employees operate CLOCK-IN/OUT in not
allowance time.

Perform CLOCK-IN operation.

Overtime work.

Follow the prompt message.

Program the arrangement again.
Enter proper value again.
Enter proper key again.
Enter file/record number again.

Enter the proper employee number again.
Enter proper job code.
Follow the prompt message.

There is no available shift left.
Employee attempts to operate CLOCK-OUT
whilst he/she is in a break time.
Break hours are exceeded.

Follow the prompt message.
Follow the prompt message.

Employee is at work without break.
Employee who has not done BREAK-OUT
operation attempts to operate BREAK-IN.
Sign on after you clock-in or break out.

Follow the prompt message.

Employee Report has not been reset.

Follow the prompt message.

Time & Attendance Data communication error. Follow the prompt message.
IDC FILE (1) memory is full of items.

Follow the prompt message.

IDC FILE (2) memory is full of items.

Follow the prompt message.

IDC FILE (3) memory is full of items.

Follow the prompt message.

Open check/ table data exist while resetting
fixed total.
Register non active item.
CF card is not inserted to the slot.
CF card data or formats illegal.
Insufficient memory is remained in CF card.
File name duplication error

Close the opend check/ table data first.

Magnetic card read error.
Card prefix code error
Card is expired.
Card validation is failed.
Card format error
Attempt is made to set a customer that already
exists in the customer file.
Customer file becomes full.
This customer does not exist.
The site No. of the file does not coincide with
the No. of the card.
Attempt to transfer when the balance is over
than the credit limit

Swipe the card again.
This card cannot be used.
This card cannot be used.
This card cannot be used.
This card cannot be used.
Enter proper customer No.

This card cannot be read.
This card format is illegal.

Delete unnecessary customer No.
Enter proper customer No.
Swipe the proper magnetic card.
Release credit limit by OPEN2.
Make minus, void, or refund operation to
decrease the balance under the credit limit.
Perform finalization or cancellation.
Swipe the magnetic card again.
Swipe the proper magnetic card.
Follow the prompt message.
Follow the prompt message.

Prompt message
E254 Enter phone number.
**********
E259 Terminal out of order
YES:Retry
NO: Skip

A-4-2

Meaning
Comminication error to the machine ** during
auto updating scanning PLU.

Action
Follow the prompt message.
Follow the prompt message.

Operation prompt
All prompt messages, together with descriptors and symbol characters for displaying /
printing are contained in the list below. These messages cannot be added, modified or
deleted.
Prompt message
Data cannot be printed out.
Do you want to display?
Do you want to clear data?
Cancel OK?
Please wait.
Item Consolidation Mode
Non Consolidation Mode
REG Mode
REFUND Mode
REG- Mode
Training
REG2 Mode
Please Sign on.
Enter Check/Table Number.
Enter Table Number.
Enter Number of covers.
Enter Seat Number.
Perform Slip Printing.
Issue Guest Receipt.
Perform Validation Printing.
Perform Check Printing.
Perform Check Endorsement.
Operation Code?
Re_configuration...
Re_configuration end
Clock-in OK?
Clock-out OK?
Break-in OK?
Break-out OK?
Enter cash tip amount and press
key.

Meaning
Request to check the X / Z report data which
cannot be printed out.
Confirmation to reset displayed report.
Confirmation of all void operation.
Please wait. ECR now processing.
In the item consolidation mode.
Not in the item consolidation mode.
Mode change : REG mode
Mode change : REF mode
Mode change : REG– mode
Signing on a training operator
Mode change : REG2 mode
The terminal is in signed off.
CHK# compulsory
TBL# compulsory
Covers compulsory
Seat# compulsory
Slip compulsory
GUEST RCT compulsory
VLD compulsory
CHK-PRT compulsory
CHK-END compulsory
Enter secret number for REG 2 mode.
During system reconfiguration
System reconfugiration ends
Time and attendance clock-in operation
Time and attendance clock-out operation
Time and attendance break-in operation
Time and attendance break-out operation
Time and attendance tip declaration compulsory

Communication Error

Communication error during clock-in

This procedure stops system
maximum 60 sec.
OK ?
Enter #
Enter Alphacode!
Items not found!

Alert before flash memory clear.

QT-6600 Reference Manual

Registering Non-add after RC / PD.
To search the appropriate item, enter goods name.
Items cannot be found by item searching.

R-229

Error messages
A-4-3

System error code
All error codes are contained in the list below. These error codes are displayed or printed
on error log report.

R-230

Error code

Meaning

0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0040
0041
0042
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
0051
0052
0053
0054
0055
0056
0057
0058
0059
0060
0061
0064
0065
0066
0067
0068
0069
0070
0071
0072
0073
0074
0075
0076
0077
0078
0079
0081

Handler access error (software)
Cannot execute handler (system configuration)
Break by PC
Break by ECR
DSR off before receiving command packet
Receive illegal command number of command packet
Receive illegal character
Send error (hardware)
Receive error (hardware)
Receive illegal data packet
No response error
Receive illegal command phase
Received illegal packet
CNET receive error
Illegal termination by sender
Received illegal packet during receiving data packets
Not enough data packets received
No “H” information
No “I” information
No “F” information
Illegal packet format
No file exists
Illegal block
Illegal command packet
Illegal command No. (Not CMD)
Illegal command No. (Not DATA)
Sequence error
Turn off DSR signal
Received cancellation
Retry over while waiting command
Retry over while waiting EOT
Retry over while waiting data
Received EOT
Retry over while waiting ACK
Retry over while sending data
Retry over while waiting “C”
Retry over while sending response
Retry over while excluding
Break end
Error during printing report header
Error during printing report data
Error during printing report data in work file
Error during printing report data in consolidation file
Work file clear error
Consolidation file clear error
Z lock error
Z clear error
Z lock release error
Error during accumulating to consolidation file
Error during copying report data from terminal memory to work
Error during copying stock data to terminal memory
Z lock error on satellite terminal
No appropriate file is exist on satellite terminal during collection/consolidation
Z lock release error on satellite terminal
Check tracking master is removed from system.

Error code
0082
0112
0128
0130
0134
0138
0140
0141
0144
0145
0146
0147
0152
0153
0155
0156
0158
0160
0161
0162
0163
0164
0165
0166
0167
0168
0170
0171
0172
0173
0174
0175
0176
0177
0178
0179
0180
0190
0192
0194
0197
0198
0202
0204
0205
0209
0210
0232
0233
0235
0247
0248
0249
0250
0251

Meaning
Check tracking backup master is removed from system.
Wrong NB/Purge access for INDEX
Parameter error / Maximum length of send error
Error drive
Network parameter error
Detect error in core system
Parameter error (record length exceeds work buffer)
EOF over
Calculation overflow
Undefined value of n_open () mode
Mismatch of type when closing network
Parameter error
Defined NCB is not network resource
Retry over by the target busy
Sequence error
No port exists
Target port in use
Error while getting priority
Fail to change temporary priority
Error semaphore operation to keep resource
Fail to get new sled
Error while getting semaphore
Error to operate semaphore
Error during delay
Error during termination
Error when resource return
Error during getting task ID
No code is found while search/pick up
Cannot get work buffer
File opened/fail to activate task
No file exists
ITRON service error
Cannot create file
Record number error
Detect error while memory area opening
Detect error while returning mail box / double create error
Detect error while handling memory
RCB is not mail box resource
Error send message ID
Send message length over
Ending response
Time out while waiting for ending response / no receive message
No free FCB
Memory capacity shortage
Fail to create mail box
Cannot find the coincide PCB resource
Cannot find the coincide RCB resource
ID collision when network starts
Cannot find the target ID
Protocol error
Stop token
FTP client can’t open data connection.
FTP client requested file action not taken.
FTP client local error in processing
FTP client syntax error

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-231

Error messages

R-232

Index
Index.............................................................................................................. R-233

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-233

Index
A
add check R-36, R-180, P-25
add mode P-35
alphabet key P-126
amount symbol P-134
arrangement R-33, R-51, R-180, R-209, P-21, P-25, P33, P-79, P-151
arrangement control P-85
arrow key R-29
Australian GST control P-67
auto program control R-216, P-18, P-65, P-182

B
backspace key P-127
backup master R-17
barcode R-151
batch X/Z R-208, P-21, P-33, P-151
bill copy R-33, R-180, P-25
break-in / out R-36, R-66, R-180, P-25
brightness control R-14

C
Canadian tax P-35
cancel R-38, R-138, R-180, P-25
cash amount tendered R-30, R-180, P-25
cash drawer R-14
CF X/Z conversion table P-184
character conversion for CF R-210, P-22
character conversion table P-70
character key R-25
character key table P-18
character programming keyboard P-126
character recall R-209, P-21
charge R-30, R-180, P-25
check detail P-20
check endorsement R-32, R-180, R-208, P-25
check index P-20
check print R-28, R-30, R-180, R-209, P-21, P-25, P49, P-175
check tender R-30, R-180, P-25
check tracking R-17, R-44, P-46
check window P-68, P-182
check# pop-up window definition R-211
check# popup window definition P-22
circular key P-26
clear key R-29, R-180
clerk R-12, R-164, R-193, P-20
clerk control P-75, P-81
clerk detail R-49, R-194, P-86, P-197
clerk detail link R-194
clerk feature P-185
clerk interrupt R-17, R-48, P-46
clerk key ID R-194, P-87, P-197
clerk number R-34, R-180, P-25
clerk pop-up window definition R-211, R-212, P-22
clerk totalizer R-24
clerk training R-49
clerk transfer R-30, R-180, P-25
clerk window P-87, P-197

R-234

clock-in R-62, R-85, R-86
clock-in / out R-36, R-180, P-25
clock-out R-65
collection/consolidation system R-19
COM port R-15, R-16
commission rate P-80, P-86, P-185
communication control P-41
condiment P-45, P-88
connector R-15
connector cover R-10
consecutive number R-12, P-18
consolidation file R-23
consolidation work file R-23
coupon R-31, R-180, P-25
coupon2 R-32, R-180, P-25
covers P-25
credit R-30, R-180, P-25
cube R-35, R-180, P-25
currency exchange R-33, R-180, P-25
customer R-154, R-174, R-204, P-21
customer control P-69
customer count P-134
customer group R-173, R-204, P-21, P-69, P-183
customer ID number R-38, R-180, P-25
customer title R-204, P-21, P-136, P-149, P-150

D
decimal point R-180
declaration R-180, P-25
delete key P-126
department R-33, R-169, R-180, R-191, P-18, P-25, P130, P-141, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198
department number R-37, R-180, P-25
department totalizer R-24
deposit R-31, R-180, P-25
discount R-31, R-180, P-25
display R-13
display area color definition P-18
display buffer P-21
display control P-47
display mode R-38, R-180, P-25
display on/off key R-10, R-29
double key P-26
double size letter key P-126
down arrow R-180
drawer R-15
Dutch account R-38, R-146, P-25

E
eat-in R-37, R-148, R-180, P-25
EBT tender R-30, R-180, P-25
electronic journal R-38, R-83, R-85, R-87, R-171, P-21
electronic journal display R-180, P-25
employee R-58, R-85, R-171, R-200, P-20, P-62, P-177
end R-29
endorsement R-28, P-21, P-135, P-149
enter key P-127
error correct R-32, R-180, P-25
error message R-226
ESC/SKIP key R-29, R-180, P-127

Euro

R-31, R-210, P-22, P-64, P-181

F
file concept R-23
finalize key R-30
first unit price R-34, R-180, P-25
fixed totalizer R-24, R-165, R-185, R-222, P-18, P39, P-133, P-149
flag clear P-11
flash R-164
flat PLU R-34, R-180, P-25
food stamp status shift R-34, R-180, P-25
food stamp subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25
food stamp system P-35
food stamp tender R-30, R-180, P-25
foreign currency P-134
free function R-165
ftp R-20, R-54, R-108, R-218, P-18, P-34, P-71, P72, P-184
function control P-77, P-78, P-79, P-82, P-83, P-84
function key R-25, P-130, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-203
function key totalizer R-24

G
general control R-205, P-21
grace time R-58
grand total R-203, P-19
graphic logo R-56, R-209, P-21
group R-170, R-192, P-19, P-133, P-149
group totalizer R-24
GT P-136, P-149
guest receipt message P-132

H
hand-held scanner R-16
hard key code R-12
hardware configuration R-10
home position key R-29, R-180
hourly / labor R-199
hourly item R-57, R-173, R-196, P-20
hourly item link R-196, P-63, P-180
hourly labor R-173, P-20
hourly sales R-170, R-195, P-19, P-41
house Bon R-36, R-180, P-25

I
i-Button key receiver R-10
I/O parameter R-216, P-18, P-55, P-176
IDC R-70, R-75, R-173, R-198, P-21
IDC link R-198, P-64, P-180
individual key R-164
INIT2 P-11
initialization P-8
inline R-15, P-55
inner multiplication R-143
insert key P-126
install system I-6
intelligent electronic journal R-83, P-21
IPL I-4

QT-6600 Reference Manual

item descriptors by range P-130
item search R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25

J
job code R-58, R-85, R-200, P-20, P-61, P-178
journal control P-42

K
Ketten Bon R-36, R-180, P-25
key allocation P-24
key table R-215
keyboard R-12, P-204
keyboard bitmap image R-217
keyboard color definition R-217, P-18, P-71, P-184
keyboard color theme R-217, P-18, P-70, P-184

L
LCD color control R-216
left arrow key R-180
left cursor key P-126
linkage of totalizers R-24
list R-37, R-140, R-180, P-25, P-32
list link P-90
list number R-37, R-38, R-180, P-25
loan R-31, R-180, P-25
local printer R-17
location change R-38, R-180, P-25
lock out unused key P-25

M
magnetic card reader P-57
master R-17
media change R-37, R-147, R-180, P-25
memory allocation P-14, P-204
menu level character P-22
menu level display R-14
menu shift R-34, R-180, P-25, P-47
menu shift / 2nd@ P-76, P-81
menu title P-136, P-138, P-149
merchandise subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25
message control P-43
microphone R-10, R-15
minus R-31, R-180, P-25
mode R-12, R-26
mode control R-49, P-76, P-82
mode key R-29, R-180, P-25
money declaration P-36, P-37
monthly sales R-170, R-195, P-19
multiplication R-180, P-25, P-134

N
new / old check R-36, R-180, P-25
new balance R-30, R-180, P-25
new check R-35, R-180, P-25
no key R-29, R-180
no sale R-32, R-180, P-25
non-add R-32, R-180, P-25
non-add / no sale R-32, R-180, P-25
normal receipt R-31, R-180, P-25

R-235

Index
number of customer R-32, R-180, P-25
numeric key R-29, R-180

O
OBR R-36, R-180, P-25
old check R-36, R-180, P-25
online P-55
open R-34, R-180, P-25
open check R-37, R-146, R-171, R-180, P-25
open2 R-34, R-180, P-25
operation prompt R-229
operator number R-35, R-180, P-25
operator read / reset R-34, R-180, P-25
order character R-210, P-21, P-148
order character change R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25
order character link P-132
order control P-44
order of date P-35
order print P-88, P-90

P
page down key R-29, R-180
page up key R-29, R-180
paid out R-31, R-180, P-25
panel fixing screw R-10
payment R-38, R-180, P-25
physical key table P-18
pick up R-31, R-180, P-25
PLU R-33, R-165, R-180, R-187, P-18, P-25, P-129, P140, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198
PLU 2nd@ R-187, P-21, P-129, P-140, P-142, P-147, P148, P-198
PLU 2nd@ feature P-89
PLU feature P-88
PLU totalizer R-24
plus R-32, R-180, P-25
post entry R-37, R-144, R-180, P-25
power switch R-15
power switch cover R-10
premium R-32, R-180, P-25
preparation P-88
presetting date P-140
presetting time P-140
price R-33, R-180, P-25
price inquiry R-30, R-180, P-25
print buffer P-21
print control P-38
printer connection table R-216, P-18, P-59, P-176
pulldown group R-141, R-207, P-21, P-32, P-131, P143, P-150

Q
QT-6060D R-16
quadruple key P-26
quantity / for R-35, R-180, P-25

R
random code P-40
random PLU P-36
recall R-37, R-46, R-180, P-25

R-236

receipt R-26, R-32, R-180, P-25
receipt / slip message R-208, P-21
receipt message P-132, P-148
receipt on / off R-35, R-180, P-25
received on account R-31, R-180, P-25
recovery I-9
rectangular key P-26
refund R-32, R-160, R-180, P-25
register minus R-160
registration buffer P-21
remote display R-16, P-56
remote IPL I-5
remote printer R-16, R-17, R-39, P-55
report control P-39, P-40
report header R-206, P-21, P-135, P-149
right arrow key R-180
right cursor key P-126
round repeat R-37, R-152, R-180, P-25
rounding P-35, P-36, P-37, P-39, P-50, P-61, P-64, P133

S
satellite R-17
scanner P-56
scanning PLU R-148
scanning PLU link P-203
schedule R-58, R-201, P-20, P-62, P-178
scheduler R-210, P-21, P-48, P-175
scroll area R-12
seat number R-37, R-180, P-25
second unit price R-34, R-180, P-25
selective item subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25
self master R-17
separate check R-36, R-145, R-180, P-25
set menu R-141, R-207, P-21, P-33, P-45, P-151
shared check tracking R-44
shift key P-126
shift PLU R-34, R-151, R-165, R-175, R-180, R-188, P20, P-25, P-143
sign on R-68
sign on / off R-136
Singaporian tax P-35
single item P-88, P-90
slip R-28
slip back feed / release R-33, R-180, P-25
slip control P-42
slip feed / release R-33, R-180, P-25
slip message P-132
slip print R-33, R-180, P-25
slip printer R-16, P-57
sound R-211, P-22
sound control P-47
sound volume control R-136
SP-1300 R-16
space key P-126
special character R-206, P-21, P-134, P-149
split payment R-146
split pricing P-134
square R-35, R-180, P-25
stand R-10

status icons R-12
stock R-168
stock inquiry R-30, R-180, P-25
store R-37, R-46, R-180, P-25
subdepartment R-37, R-168, R-180, R-186, P-18, P25, P-129, P-141, P-142, P-147, P-148, P-198
subdepartment feature P-90
subdepartment number R-37, R-180, P-25
subdepartment totalizer R-24
substitution R-36, R-142, R-180, P-25
subtotal R-34, R-180, P-25
suspend R-144
system configuration R-17
system connection R-215, P-18, P-54, P-176
system down I-9
system error code R-230
system error log R-216, P-18
system key R-25, R-29

W
work time R-199, P-20

X
X/Z report R-28
X/Z report control P-85

Y
yes key

R-29, R-180

T
table analysis R-170, R-202, P-19, P-20, P-50, P-175
table number R-34, R-180, P-25
table range P-80, P-86, P-185
table sharing R-38, R-155, R-180, P-25
table transfer R-31, R-46, R-180, P-25
takeout R-37, R-148, R-180, P-25
tax exempt R-34, R-180, P-25
tax status shift R-33, R-180, P-25
tax system P-35
tax table R-206, P-21, P-50, P-176
taxable amount subtotal R-35, R-180, P-25
taxable status P-89
taxable symbol P-134
TCP/IP R-218, P-18, P-71, P-72, P-184
terminal file R-23
text print R-30, R-180, P-25
text recall R-30, R-180, P-25, P-132, P-148
time & attendance R-58, P-20, P-61
time zone R-200, P-20, P-60, P-177
tip R-31, R-180, P-25
touch screen key table R-215, P-18
touch screen panel R-10
transaction key R-186, R-189, P-18
tray total R-34, R-180, P-25
two zero R-180

U
U.S. tax P-35
up arrow R-180
UP-350 R-16, R-40
UP-360 R-16, R-40

V
validation R-27, R-32, R-180, P-25
VAT R-33, R-180, P-25, P-35, P-40
VAT & VAT P-52, P-53
void R-32, R-137, R-180, P-25
void reason R-170, P-19
void table R-202, P-54, P-176

QT-6600 Reference Manual

R-237

CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan

MA0811-A
Printed in Japan
QT-6600REF*E

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access : Print, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Create Date : 2008:12:28 17:46:06
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.0.5 for Macintosh
Author : Casio Computer Co., Ltd.
Creator : PageMaker 6.5
Title : Reference manual
Modify Date : 2008:12:28 17:51:49+09:00
Subject : QT-6600 English 081228-tentative
Page Count : 240
Page Layout : TwoColumnRight

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu

Upload a User Manual

Versions of this User Manual:

Wiki Guide
HTML
Download & Help

Views

User Manual

Discussion / Help

Navigation